KE6910ATC - Commutateur AV ATEN - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL KE6910ATC ATEN

KVM over IP Extender and

KVM over IP Matrix Manager

User Manual

Compliance Statements

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Warning

Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio interference.

Achtung

Industry Canada Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAN ICES-003 (A) / NMB-003 (A)

HDMI Trademark Statement

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

RoHS

This product is RoHS compliant.

User Information

Online Registration

Be sure to register your product at our online support center:

International http://eservice.aten.com

Telephone Support

For telephone support, call this number:

International 886-2-86	92-6959
China 86-400-810-0-8	10
Japan 81-3-5615-5811
Korea 82-2-467-6789
North America 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988
	1-949-428-1111

User Notice

All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is. Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software.

The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS CORRECT BEFORE USE.

Product Information

For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:

International http://www.aten.com

North America http://www.aten-usa.com

Package Contents

Check to make sure that all the components are in working order. If you encounter any problem, please contact your dealer.

KE6900 / KE6940

KE6900T / KE6940T DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940T only)
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6900R / KE6940R DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

KE6900A / KE6940A

KE6900AT / KE6940AT DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AT only)
1 power adapter
1 foot pad et
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions

KE6900AR / KE6940AR DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter

1 user instructions

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter with Internet Port:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6900ST

KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Transmitter Lite:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6910 / KE6912

KE6910T / KE6912T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 power adapter (KE6910T only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6910R / KE6912R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter (KE6910R only)

1 user instructions

KE6910ATC

KE6910T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter:

2 Transmitter

2 USB DVI-D KVM cable

2 power adapter

2 mounting kit

2 user instructions

KE6910R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter

1 user instructions

KE6920 / KE6922

KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP / KE6922T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP & PoE:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 power adapter (KE6920T only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP / KE6922R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP & PoE:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE6920R only)
1 user instructions

KE6920ATC

KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP:

2 Transmitter
2 USB DVI-D KVM cable
2 power adapter
2 mounting kit
2 user instructions

KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

KE8900S

KE8900ST Slim HDMI KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB HDMI KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE8900SR Slim HDMI KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver

1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions

KE8950 / KE8952

KE8950T / KE8952T 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB HDMI KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter (KE8950T only)
1 mounting kit
1 HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions

KE8950R / KE8952R 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE8950R only)
1 HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions

KE9900ST

KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 DisplayPort cable
1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions

KE9950 / KE9952

KE9950T / KE9952T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 DisplayPort cable
1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter (KE9950T only)
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions

KE9950R / KE9952R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE9950R only)
1 user instructions

KE9950ATC

KE9950T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

2 Transmitter
2 DisplayPort cable
2 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
2 power adapter
2 mounting kit
2 user instructions

KE9950R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

Contents

Compliance Statements ...... ii

User Information iv

Online Registration iv

Telephone Support iv

User Notice iv

Product Information v

Package Contents ...... vi

KE6900 / KE6940 ...... vi

KE6900A / KE6940A ...... vi

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

KE6900ST......vii

KE6910 / KE6912....vii

KE6910ATC......viii

KE6920 / KE6922......viii

KE6920ATC ix

KE8900S ix

KE8950 / KE8952....x

KE9900ST....x

KE9950 / KE9952 xi

KE9950ATC xi

Contents ..... xii

About This Manual .... xxii

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Chapter 1. Introduction

Overview 1

Features 4

More Features for ATC Models 6

Exclusive Features for ATC Industry 6

Hardware 6

Management 7

Security 7

Virtual Media 7

Supported Video Resolutions ....8

Requirements 9

Operating System 9

Console 9

Computers 10

Cables 10

CCKM Requirements 10

Virtual Machine 11

Components 12

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View 12

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View 13

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View 15

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View 17

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View 19

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View 20

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View 22

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View 23

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View 25

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View 26

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View 28

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View ..... 29

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View 31

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View 32

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View 34

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View 35

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View 37

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View 38

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View 40

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View 41

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View 43

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View 45

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View 47

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View 48

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View 50

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View 51

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View 53

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View 54

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View 56

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View 58

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View ..... 59

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View 61

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View 62

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View ..... 64

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View 66

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View ..... 68

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View 70

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View ..... 71

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View 73

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View ..... 74

PoE Power Redundancy....75

Chapter 2.Hardware Setup

Mounting 77

Attaching the Mounting Bracket 78

Non-Slim Transmitters....78

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 79

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST ..... 79

Rack Mount 81

Non-Slim Transmitters ....81

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 82

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST ..... 82

Wall Mount 83

Non-Slim Transmitters 83

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 84

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST ..... 84

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 85

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 88

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 ..... 89

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 90

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation ..... 91

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 94

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 96

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 97

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 99

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 100

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 102

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 103

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 .... 104

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 105

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 106

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation .....109

Setting up a ●AN Installation 109

KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation 111

Setting up a ●AN Installation 111

KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation 113

Setting up a ●AN Installation 113

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 115

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation 118

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

KE6900 / KE6940 ●AN Installation 121

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 123

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 124

KE6900A / KE6940A ●AN Installation 125

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 126

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 127

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT ●AN Installation 128

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 129

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 130

KE6910 / KE6912 ●AN Installation 131

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 132

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 133

KE6910ATC ●AN Installation 134

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 135

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 136

KE6920 / KE6922 • AN Installation 137

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 138

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 139

KE6920ATC ●AN Installation 140

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 141

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 142

KE8950 / KE8952 ●AN Installation 143

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 145

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 146

KE9950 / KE9952 ●AN Installation 147

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 148

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 149

KE9950ATC ●AN Installation 150

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 151

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 152

Network Configuration 153

Exit OSD 154

Default IP Addresses 154

KE ATC Series Bundle Hotkey 155

KE I/O Ports 157

-ED Display 158

Chapter 3.OSD Operation

Overview....159

Invoking the OSD 159

Touch Screen Calibration 159

OSD Hotkeys 160

Non-OSD Hotkeys. 160

Reverting to Previous 160

Hotkey Mode 160

Microphone Hotkey 161

OSD Interface 161

- ogging in for the First Time .... 162

Receiver Configuration 163

Network 163

Properties 164

Regular Version 164

Slim Version....167

ATC Version 169

System 172

Transmitter Configuration 172

Network 173

Properties 174

System 177

Internet Port (AiT Models only) 178

IP Installer 179

Service Ports 179

IPv4 Settings 179

IPv6 Settings 180

CCVSR 181

Working Mode 181

User Preferences 182

OSD Matrix Mode 183

Connections Page 184

-ist Mode 184

Array Mode 187

Profile Page 189

Push Content 190

Pull Content 192

Chapter 4. Software Installation

Overview 193

Download 193

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install 196

Upgrading •icense 200

- linux Installation 201

Chapter 5.Browser / Telnet Operation

Overview 205

- ogging In 205

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page 207

Web Components 207

Interactive Display Panel .....208

Installation Wizard 209

Adding Transmitters and Receivers 210

Adding Network Switches 213

Instant ●ink 215

RS-232 / Telnet 217

Telnet 217

RS-232 218

Configuration Menu. 219

Main Menu. 219

1. Network 220
2. Properties 220
3. System 221

Chapter 6. System Status

Overview....223

System Status 224

Transmitter 226

SFP Module Detection 227

Transmitter Configuration 228

Internet Port (AiT models only) 233

Basic 234

CCVSR 235

Mode 235

IPv4 Settings 235

IPv6 Settings 236

Private Certificate 236

Certificate Signing Request 237

Copy & Paste 239

Virtual Transmitter. 240

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management 242

Transmitter Group 243

Transmitter Permissions 244

Receiver 246

SFP Module Detection 247

Receiver Configuration 248

Copy & Paste 251

Receiver Group 253

Video Wall. 254

Receiver Permissions 257

Switch 258

Network Switch Configuration 259

Port Configuration 260

Account 261

Users....261

Adding Users. 261

Modifying Users 264

Deleting Users 264

Groups 265

Adding Groups 265

Modifying Groups 266

Deleting Groups 266

Permissions 267

Assigning Device Permissions 267

Profile 269

Adding a Profile 270

Adding a Schedule 272

•og . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Chapter 7. System Settings

Overview 275

General 275

Connection Redundancy 281

- ogin Access Priority (AiT Models only) .....284

ANMS 285

Event Destination 286

Authentication 288

SNMP 292

SMTP 293

Syslog 295

FW Upgrade ....296

Firmware Upgrade Recovery .....297

Redundancy 298

Private Certificate 302

Certificate Signing Request 303

Sessions 305

Chapter 8.Connections

Overview 307

Connections 308

Chapter 9. Scheduled Profile

Overview 311

Chapter 10.Sessions

Overview 313

Chapter 11. ATEN Matrix Link

Overview 315

Requirements 315

Accessing CCKM 315

Monitoring 317

Adjusting Preview Size 317

Searching for a Device 317

Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection 318

Connecting Tx-Rx 319

Access Types 320

-ogout. 320

Chapter 12.Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction 321

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) 322

The Windows/Java Client AP 324

Download 324

Starting Up 325

The Control Panel 327

Control Panel Functions 328

Macros 330

Hotkeys 330

Video Settings 332

Gamma Adjustment 333

Virtual Media 335

Virtual Media Icons 335

Virtual Media Redirection 335

Smart Card Reader 338

Zoom 338

The On-Screen Keyboard 339

Mouse Pointer Type 340

Mouse DynaSync Mode 340

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync) 341

Manual Mouse Synchronization 341

Control Panel Configuration 342

Chapter 13.Firmware Upgrade Utility

Preparation 345

Starting the Upgrade 346

Upgrade Succeeded 348

Firmware Upgrade Recovery 349

Chapter 14.CLI Commands

Serial Control Protocol Commands 351

Configuring the Serial Port 351

Device/Profile Commands 352

Telnet 352

Verification 352

Switch Port Command 353

Mute Command 357

Profile Command 359

EDID Command 361

Reset Command 363

RS-232 Command 364

OSD Command 367

-ist Command 368

Read Command 370

Set Command 374

Appendix

Safety Instructions....383

General 383

Rack Mount ....385

Technical Support 386

International 386

North America 386

Specifications 387

KE6900T / KE6940T 387

KE6900R / KE6940R 389

KE6900AT / KE6940AT 390

KE6900AR / KE6940AR 392

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT 393

KE6900ST 395

KE6910 396

KE6912 398

KE6920 400

KE6922 402

KE8900S 404

KE8950T / KE8952T 405

KE8950R / KE8952R 407

KE9900ST 409

KE9950 410

KE9952 412

Optional Rack Mount 414

Dual Rack Mount....414

Transmitter Dual Rack Mount 414

Receiver Dual Rack Mount 416

Single Rack Mount 418

IP Installer 420

Trusted Certificates 421

Overview 421

Self-Signed Private Certificates 422

Examples 422

Importing the Files 422

Reset All Information 423

Default Password Pins 424

RS-232 Pin Assignments 430

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port 430

Multicast IP Address 431

KE Multicast Rule 431

Multicast IP Formula 431

If X is between 0 \~ 127 .....431

If X is between 128 \~ 192 .....432

If X is 192 or higher ..... 432

Keys to Network Performance 433

Build a Network Diagram 433

Other Factors 433

Choose a High Performance Switch 435

- layer 2 or -layer 3 Switches .... 435

Considerations 435

Number of ports 435

Stackable verse Standalone 435

What Stackable Switches Can do: 436

Switch Specifications....436

Configuring Switches and KE Devices 437

KE transmitter Settings: 437

Recommended Network Switches 437

Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures 438

Windows: 438

Sun / ●inux 439

Virtual Media Support 440

WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP 440

Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP....440

Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows 441

- imited Warranty.... 442

About This Manual

This manual is provided to help you get the most out of your KVM over IP Matrix System. It covers all aspects of the device and system, including installation, configuration, and operation.

The KVM over IP Extender models covered in this user manuals are:

Models	Product Names
KE6900 DV	Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900A D	VI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900AiT	DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access
KE6900ST	DVI KVM over IP Extender •ite
KE6910 DV	-D Dual •ink KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6912 DV	-D Dual •ink KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KE6920 DV	-D Dual •ink KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual SFP
KE6922 DV	-D Dual •ink KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual SFP & PoE
KE6940 DV	Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940A D	VI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940AiT	DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access
KE8900S Sl	HDMI KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8950 4K	HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8952 4K	HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KE9900ST	Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter)
KE9950 4K	DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE9952 4K	DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE

An overview of the information found in the manual is provided below.

Chapter 1, Introduction, introduces you to the KVM over IP Matrix System, its purpose, features, and benefits, with its front and back panel components described.

Chapter 2, Hardware Setup, provides step-by-step instructions for setting up your installation, and explains some basic operation procedures.

Chapter 3, OSD Operation, explains the fundamental concepts involved in operating the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT / KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952, and provides a complete description of the On Screen Displays (OSDs) and the functions contained.

Chapter 4, Software Installation, explains the administrative procedures that are required to download and install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on Windows and Linux systems.

Chapter 5, Browser / Telnet Operation, explains how to log in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager with a web browser, and describes the various functions provided.

Chapter 6, System Status, explains how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's system status panel to manage transmitters, receivers, switches, users, profiles, and logs.

Chapter 7, System Settings, explains the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's system settings, which are categorized into General, ANMS, LDAP/AD, RADIUS, TACACS+ authentication, F/W Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions tabs.

Chapter 8, Connections, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager ‘s connections panel to quickly view, connect, and disconnect Transmitter-Receiver connections.

Chapter 9, Scheduled Profile, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's scheduled profile panel to view and manage profile schedules.

Chapter 10, Sessions, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's sessions panel to view and disconnect user sessions.

Chapter 11, ATEN Matrix Link, introduces the ATEN Matrix Link app, which allows users to monitor and manage the CCKM server remotely from an iPad.

Chapter 12, Remote Viewer (AiT Models only), describes how to use remote viewer(s) to view and control video sources connected to AiT transmitters.

Chapter 13, Firmware Upgrade Utility, explains how to download and use the Firmware Upgrade Utility for upgrading the firmware of the devices connected.

Chapter 14, CLI Commands, provides a complete list of the serial protocol and TCP/IP commands used when utilizing the RS-232 serial port or a network connection to configure the KE devices.

Appendix, provides the technical and troubleshooting information of KE devices at the end of the manual.

Note:

• Read this manual thoroughly and follow the installation and operation procedures carefully to prevent any damage to the unit or connected devices.
• The product may be updated, with features and functions added, improved or removed since the release of this manual. For an up-to-date user manual, visit http://www.aten.com/global/en/

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.

[ ] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them: [Ctrl+Alt].

1. Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.

◆ Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential steps.

Indicates selecting consecutive options (such as on a menu or dialog box). For example, Start > Run means to open the Start menu, and then select Run.

Indicates critical information.

Overview

The KVM over IP Matrix System is a solution that combines KE Series KVM over IP Extenders (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE6900ST, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE8900S, KE8950, KE8952, KE9900ST, KE9950, KE9952), with the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) to extend, control and monitor access to computers, across a network, in a multitude of ways. The system lets you setup a matrix of remote KVM consoles that access computers across a network, with the flexibility to control and configure each connection.

The high-performance IP-based KE Extenders are consisted of a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter connects to a computer to deliver the computer's data to the receiver to collectively provide console access from a remote or separate location. The computer can be accessed from the remote console via a standard TCP/IP network or direct Ethernet cable connection. This is perfect for any installation where you need to place the console where it is convenient, but you want the computer to reside in a secure location — away from the keyboard, mouse and display.

The extenders support flawless and lossless video compression quality with ultra low latency, some extenders also support 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60Hz), which is used widely in the Air Traffic Control (ATC) industry. For a list of video resolution support, refer to Supported Video Resolutions on page 8.

For power redundancy, some extenders have dual power supplies, some provide single power supply with a Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAN port, while some provide dual power supplies and a PoE LAN port.

Some extenders support Fiber Channel over Ethernet via SFP fiber modules* which connect to a network switch at speeds up to 1 Gbps. The extenders can connect unit-to-unit or over a TCP/IP network via Gigabit Ethernet or the SFP ports. Connecting both methods allows network failover.

The non-slim KE over IP Extenders have local On Screen Display (OSD) on the receiver end to configure both receiver and transmitter — for easy setup and operation. Both the transmitter and receiver have RS-232 ports to connect

to a serial terminal for configuration or serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode scanners.

The AiT models can connect to an Office LAN to support the Control Center Video Session Recorder (CCVSR) software and WinClient/JavaClient. The CCVSR records all operations made on servers accessed through KVM over IP switches. Every operation and change are recorded and saved to a secure video file for security reference and troubleshooting purposes, etc. By using WinClient/JavaClient, you are provided with console access from a separate location over intranet and/or Internet.

Slimmer versions of KE over IP Extenders are also available. These are KE6900ST, KE8900S or KE9900ST, and are cost and space saving alternatives for installations with extenders that don't need a local console or audio transmission, but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models. KE6900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DVI input. KE8900S offers a slim KVM over IP Transmitter (KE8900ST) and a slim KVM over IP Receiver (KE8900SR) to respectively support HDMI video input from the computer and one HDMI monitor output. KE9900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DisplayPort input. In addition to a DC power jack, both the KE8900ST and KE9900ST transmitters have an extra DC terminal block each for convenient installation.

Since different KE over IP Extenders support different types of video interfaces (DVI, HDMI, DisplayPort, etc.), video resolutions, power redundancy function and network failover feature, administrators/users may select and tailor what is currently best for your environment, and for expected or unexpected future expansions.

Refer to the table below for the variations in interfaces, functions and features:

Models	DVI HDMI DisplayPort		Power Redundancy via PoE*	Power Redundancy via Second Power Jack	Network Failover - SFP
KE6900 1 -	---
KE6900A 1	--- 1 1
KE6900AiT	1 --- 1 1
KE6900ST	----
KE6910 1 -	- 1 1
KE6912 1 -	1 - 1
KE6920 1 -	- 1 2
KE6922 1 -	1 1 2
KE6940 2 -	---
KE6940A 2	--- 1 1
KE6940AiT	2 --- 1 1
KE8900S	- 1 ---		-
KE8950	- 1 --- 1

Models	DVI HDMI DisplayPort			Power Redundancy via PoE*	Power Redundancy via Second Power Jack	Network Failover - SFP
KE8952 - 1	- 1 - 1
KE9900ST	- 1 ---
KE9950 --	- 1 1
KE9952 --	1 - 1

*Power redundancy via PoE requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).

KVM over IP Extenders allow flexible setup as they can make console-to-computer connections in several ways: one-to-one (Extender mode), one-to-many (Splitter mode), many-to-one (Switch mode), or many-to-many (Matrix mode).

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) allows you to define the aforementioned matrix connections and manage KE Extenders with features such as auto-detection of KE Extenders, username/password authentication, switching and sharing of connections, scheduling, permissions and more. Whether you're extending computer access for Monitoring, Broadcasting, Editing or Workstation setup, the KVM over IP Matrix System gives you the flexibility and control to manage one or hundreds of extended connections. For more detailed feature list, refer to Features on page 4.

Note: The SFP module is sold separately. You can choose the 2A-136G, a multi-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 550 meters; or the 2A-137G, a single-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 10 kilometers. Visit ATEN's website or contact your ATEN dealer for more information.

Features

• Remote KVM console access of computers over LAN or Ethernet cable connection
• Dual console operation — control your system from both the Transmitter and Receiver by USB keyboard, monitor, and mouse
• RS-232 serial ports allows you to connect to a serial terminal for configuration, and serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode scanners ^1
• Superior video quality ^2 — up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz with 24-bit color depth (KE69 Series / KE8900S); up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) with 24-bit color depth (KE99 Series); and up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) (KE8950 / KE8952)
• Supports standard resolutions from 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz (KE69 Series / KE8900S); resolutions from 640 x 480 to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 (KE99 Series), and 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) (KE8950 and KE8952)
  ◆ Supports 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60 Hz) (KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922)
  ♦ OSD (On Screen Display) on the Receiver configures Tx / Rx devices
  ◆ Supports KVM over IP Matrix Manager Web GUI administration ^3
  ◆ Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality — compliant with IEEE 802.3at and 802.3af standards (KE6912, KE6922, KE8952 and KE9952)
• Boundless Switching — simply move the mouse cursor across screen boundaries to switch between different receivers
• Intelligent Dual Video Output Management — split two video sources from a dual display Transmitter and connect to each from different Receivers (KE6940/KE6940A)
  ♦ Gigabit Ethernet port
• Remote login security
  ♦ DVI digital and analog monitor support (KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
  ♦ DVI digital monitor support (KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922)
  ♦ HDMI monitor support (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952)
  ◆ DisplayPort monitor support (KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952)

◆ Built-in ESD protection and surge protection
- Supports 2 channel analog (KE69 Series) and 7.1 channel surround sound (KE89 / KE99 Series) stereo speakers and microphone
- Auto-MDIX — automatically detects cable type
◆ Supports widescreen formats
◆ Supports High-Quality Video streaming
- Virtual Media Support
- Hot pluggable
- Rack Mountable
- Upgradeable firmware
◆ Supports digital audio (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952)
- Adaptive Fast Switching — automatically fast switches between different Tx video resolutions on a Rx display within 0.3 second (KE6910/KE6912)
- Authentication Lock — automatically logs in when the power of the system is resumed after power off
- Connection Redundancy — automatically connects to another transmitter (Tx) after disconnection with the original Tx, ensuring constant access to servers (KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
- Disconnection Alert — Pop-up warning message and looping alarm beeping notify users the disconnection status (KE6910/KE6912)
- Instant Link — Switch intuitively and efficiently between transmitter (Tx) on a receiver (Rx) display
- Supports recording of remotely-accessed computer operations using ATEN CCVSR Video Session Recording Software
- “Push” and “Pull” — shares content instantly to/from a single Rx or video wall by just one click
- Video Walls — create multiple video walls with up to 8 x 8 (64 displays max.) in each layout
- Four selectable access modes for multiple simultaneous access (Exclusive/ Occupy/Share/ View only mode)
◆ Supports remote access via WinClient / JavaClient over intranet or Internet
- Rx access control — users at the Tx local console can enable / disable Rx access by simply pressing a control button ^4

Note: 1. RS-232 serial ports support Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS/DTR/DSR signals only.

1. Refer to Supported Video Resolutions below for details.

2. The KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI can be updated from the CCKM page on our website (www.aten.com) or via eService website (http://eservice.aten.com). The free version supports up to 8 KE devices. To obtain a license for the full version of the software, please contact your ATEN dealer.

3. The KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G) is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

More Features for ATC Models

Exclusive Features for ATC Industry

• Supports power / network failover – 2 DC jacks for power redundancy and 1 RJ-45 & 2 SFP fiber ports for network failover to ensure constant availability for mission-critical applications
  ◆ Supports 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60 Hz)
• Disconnection Alert - pop-up warning message and looping alarm beeping notify users the disconnection status

Hardware

• Supports DisplayPort video resolutions up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4); 24-bit color depth
• Supports DVI-D Dual Link video resolutions up to 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz and 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
  ◆ Supports digital video output
  ♦ Compliant with DP 1.2 and HDCP 1.3
  ◆ Supports stereo speakers and stereo microphone
  ◆ High speed USB Storage Transmission support
  ◆ Built-in 8KV / 15KV ESD protection and 2KV surge protection
  ◆ Fanless design for silent operations that are energy efficient
• Supports connection via Gigabit Ethernet port (RJ-45) or SFP port for failover
  ◆ Supports 1Gbps SFP fiber module* expansions up to 10 km
  ♦ Power Redundancy – 2 DC Jack for power redundancy

♦ Rack Mountable – Mounting options:

◆ 2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit
◆ 2X-031G Single Rack Mount Kit

- An industrial-grade power adapter included - supports operating temperature of 0°C\~50°C to ensure durability and adaptability under harsh environmental conditions

Note: The SFP module (2A-136G / 2A-137G) is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Management

• Local console for emergency operation
• EDID Expert™ – selects optimum EDID settings to prevent video compatibility issue caused by different monitors
• Video Compression Level – allows you to increase / decrease the video quality to adjust for appropriate network bandwidth
• CLI – administrators can control all KE devices via RS-232 or Telnet by issuing commands
• RS-232 serial ports – allows you to connect to a serial terminal for TextMenu, CLI, or serial devices such as touch screens and barcode scanners

Security

• Dedicated LAN port for KE direct connections – can be isolated from the corporate network
• Secure data transmission – 128-bit AES encryption to secure all data before it’s transmitted over a network and decrypts the data on the receiver
  ◆ Supports industry standard Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol

Virtual Media

• Virtual Media mode enhances data transmission performance, ideally for file transfers, OS patching, software installations and diagnostic testing
• Supports USB 2.0 DVD / CD drives, USB mass storage devices, PC hard drives and ISO images
  ◆ Supports Smart Card / CAC Reader

Supported Video Resolutions

Resolutions	KE6900 / KE6940 KE6900A / KE6940A KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT	KE6910 / KE6912 KE6920 / KE6922	KE8950 / KE8952	KE9950 / KE9952	KE6900ST / KE8900S / KE9900ST
3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0) ●
3840 x 2160 @ 24/25/30 Hz ●
3440 x 1440 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ● ●
2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ● ●
2560 x 1080 @ 24/25/30/50/60/100/120 Hz			●
2048 x 2048 @ 30/60 Hz ●
2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz ● ●
2048 x 1536 @ 30 Hz ●
2048 x 1152 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 30 Hz ● ●
1920 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ● ●
1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1600 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1680 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1400 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1280 x 1024 @ 60/75 Hz ● ● ● ● ●
1280 x 960 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ● ●
1280 x 800 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 900 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1152 x 864 @ 75 Hz ● ● ● ●
1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1280 x 720 @ 60 Hz ● ● ● ●
1024 x 768 @ 60/70/75/85 Hz ● ● ● ●
848 x 480 @ 60 Hz ●
800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75/85 Hz	● ● ● ●
720 x 400 @ 70/85 Hz ● ● ● ●
640 x 480 @ 60/72/75/85 Hz	● ● ● ●

Requirements

Operating System

KE series devices are compatible with the following operating systems:

OS Versions
Windows 32	-bit XP / 7	/ 8
	64-bit XP	/ 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 / Server 2016 / Server 2019
•inux		◆CentOS◆Ubuntu◆openSUSE◆Red Hat

• Mac OS
  Oracle Solaris

Console

♦ (KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922) One DVI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
♦ (KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI compatible monitors capable of the highest possible resolution
♦ (KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
♦ (KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
♦ A USB mouse
♦ A USB keyboard
♦ Microphone and speakers

Computers

The following ports must be available on each computer that is to be connected to the system:

♦ (KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922) One DVI port
♦ (KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI ports
♦ (KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI port
♦ (KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort port
♦ USB Type A port
- Audio ports

Cables

- For optimal signal integrity and to simplify the setup, we strongly recommend that you only use the high quality custom USB KVM Cable that is provided with this package.

CCKM Requirements

The minimum hardware and software requirements for the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager are:

♦ Processor: Pentium 4, 2.60 GHz or above
◆ Memory: 1 GB or above
♦ HDD: 500 MB or above
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 10 (or later), Chrome 70 (or later), Firefox 62 (or later)
♦ Operating System Requirements:

◆ Windows 7, 8.1, 10, server 2008, server 2012, or server 2016
- Linux Ubuntu 16.04, CentOS 7

Note: Only Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 8 and OpenJDK 8 are supported.

Virtual Machine

CCKM supports the following virtual machine and versions:

OS Versions
VMware ESXi		◆ 4.x (4.0)◆ 5.x (5.0, 5.1, 5.5)◆ 6.x (6.0)
XenServer		◆ 2.5◆ 4.0◆ 5.x (5.0, 5.5)◆ 6.x (6.0)
Hyper-v		◆ on Win 7 / 8.1 / 10◆ on Windows Server 2008 / 2012 / 2016 / 2019

Components

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo	eo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights	green to indicate which side of the installation (local or remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates	the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports	The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN	port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
9 DVI-I	output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View

POWER LAN GEAL RESMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3	local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4	remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5	graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6	OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7	video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button	must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini	stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port	for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
5 power jack The cable	from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this	slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-	232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note: When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, see USB Mode, page 250.
9 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
8 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
9 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, see USB Mode, page 250.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit	Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights Green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
	1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
	2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
	3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
	4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
	5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
	6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo	eo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	Remote / ●ocal ●ED ●ights	green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates	the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 *

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack (KE6910T only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View

2 3 1 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 *

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
11 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack (KE6910R only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo	eo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights	green to indicate which side of the installation(●ocal or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates	the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
	1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
	2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
	3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
	4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
	5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
9 SFP slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN can be plugged here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View

2 3 1 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.

No.	Component Description
7 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB
9 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
10 SFP slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN can be plugged here.
11 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo	e0 ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights	green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates	the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports	The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN	port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
9 DVI-I	output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View

1 432 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No.	Component Description	on
1	grounding terminal The	wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2	reset button This button	must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3	audio ports These mini	stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4	USB port Use this port	for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, seeUSB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
5	power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6	function switch Use this	slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension:Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

No.	Component Description
8 console ports The unit's	USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 ●AN port The cable that	connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
10 DVI-I output The cable	from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo	eo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM	cable and the DVI cable supplied with the package plugs into these ports to link the Transmitter to the computer.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 s	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights	Green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates	the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View

1 2 3 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 cocal ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
6 Power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
8 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
9 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, see USB Mode, page 250.
10 SFP slot The Gigabit	Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
11 DVI-I output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
12 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with the package plugs into these ports to link the Transmitter to the computer.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
	1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
	2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
	3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
	4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
	5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
	6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View

Front View

1 2

Top View

6 7

Rear View

3 4 5

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.◆ Press and release to reboot the device.◆ Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.◆ Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
2 KVM port The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3 RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note: When a ●AN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE6900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no ●AN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE6900ST for local configuration and control.
4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
No.	Component Description
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆Orange: 10 Mbps◆Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆Green: 1000 Mbps◆Off when not connected to the ●AN.
7 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights Green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 Console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
9 SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
10 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View

2 3 1 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8	console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, seeUSB Mode, page 250.
9	●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (seePoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
10	SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
11	HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.

◆ Press and release to reboot the device.
Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.
- Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

No.	Component Description
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
5 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a ●AN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no ●AN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB Type-B port The	USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 HDMI input The cable	from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal block	Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 ~ 48 V) to the terminal block for power input.
9 power jack The cable	from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View

No.	Component Description
1 USB peripheral port	Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
2 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
3	set button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Information on page 423.
4	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the ●AN.
5	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
6	●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
7	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a ●AN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no ●AN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
8	HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
9	power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10	grounding terminalThe wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.

◆ Press and release to reboot the device.
- Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.
- Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

No.	Component Description
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆Orange: 10 Mbps◆Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆Green: 1000 Mbps◆Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
5 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a ●AN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no ●AN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB Type-B port The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 DisplayPort Input	The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal block	Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block for power input.
9 power jack The cable	from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local ●ED ●ights green to indicate which side of the installation (●ocal or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
6	power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11*

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config/Access Control: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 Console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
10 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack (KE9950T only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View

2 3 1 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power ●ED ●ights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 ●AN ●ED This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ ●ights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
3 local ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote ●ED ●ights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12*

No.	Component Description
1	grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2	reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 423.
3	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4	USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, seeUSB Mode, page 250.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5	power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6	function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension:Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 ●AN port The cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 75 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the ●AN plugs in here.
11 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack (KE9950R only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

PoE Power Redundancy

For power redundancy with PoE-enabled models, the unit's underside label must be printed with a "Power Board Version: B01G" string. An example is shown below and the string is indicated in the diagram:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. R-R-ATN-KE9952 Model Name: 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (PoE) (Receiver) Model No: KE9952R Power Board Version: B01G S/N: A1K3-130-0001 ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO., LTD Designed by ATEN in Taiwan & Canada E3914 Made in Taiwan

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Chapter 2

Hardware Setup

1. Important safety information regard the placement of this device is found on. Please review it before proceeding.
2. Make sure that the power of all devices to be connected is turned off. You must unplug the power of any computers with Keyboard Power-on function.
3. Please operate the device with caution when under high environmental temperatures, as the surface of the device may become overheated under such conditions. For instance, the surface temperature of the device may reach 70 °C ( 158 °F ) or higher when the environmental temperature reaches close to 50 °C 122 °F .

Mounting

For convenience and flexibility, the transmitters can be mounted onto a system racks or wall.

Note: Optional mounting options are available, refer to Optional Rack Mount on page 414 for more information.

It is highly recommended to mount AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

The following sections demonstrate how to mount transmitters using the mounting kit provided.

Attaching the Mounting Bracket

Follow the steps below to attach the mounting bracket to the unit:

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same, and are exemplified using KE6900.

1. Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.

M3 x 5 NEE

1. Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter, as shown below.

M3 x 5 N50C

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Using the screws from in the mounting kit, attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter as shown below.

M3 x 5

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

The following diagrams are exemplified using KE8900ST.

1. Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.

M3 x 5

1. Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter, as shown below.

M3 x 5

Rack Mount

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same, and are exemplified using KE6900.

Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.

Technical line drawing of a mounted electronic device with mounting bracket and control panel (no text or symbols)

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12 Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.

Technical line drawing of a rectangular electronic device with mounting holes and mounting screws, shown without any text or symbols.

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12 Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Screw the mounting bracket on any convenient location of the rack.

Diagram of a door panel with mounting holes and a close-up view of the interior (no text or symbols)

Wall Mount

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same, and are exemplified using KE6900.

Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.

Line drawing of a computer tower case with ventilation slots and ports (no text or symbols)

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.

Technical line drawing of a device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Use the mounting bracket's center screw hole to mount the unit onto a wall.

Technical line drawing of a device rear panel with internal components (no text or symbols)

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900 / KE6940 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900T / KE6940T. Each port is labeled a corresponding icon for identification.*
2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE6900T / KE6940T.
3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900T / KE6940T's LAN port.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900T / KE6940T's power jack.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900R / KE6940R.**
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900R / KE6940R's LAN port.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.

10. Power on the computer.

11. A keyboard or mouse with special functions may be required to be connected using the USB ports for the functions to work (see USB Mode, page 250).

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6900T"] --> B["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A --> C["Computer"]
    D["KE6900R"] --> E["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    D --> F["Computer"]

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940 installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6900T 2 4 USB KVM cable Local PC 3

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900A / KE6940A system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6900AT/KE6940AT) ^1 .
3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6900AR/KE6940AR) ^2 .
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^3 .
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks.
12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940A with two DVI monitors, connect the second DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940 and computer.

1. A keyboard or mouse with special functions may be required to be connected using the USB ports for the functions to work (see USB Mode, page 250).

2. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["DC 5V"]
    B --> C["2"]
    C --> D["Serial Device"]
    D --> E["3"]
    E --> F["4"]
    F --> G["5"]
    G --> H["6"]
    H --> I["7"]
    I --> J["8"]
    J --> K["9"]
    K --> L["10"]
    L --> M["11"]
    N["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> O["9"]
    P["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> Q["11"]
    R["KE6900AT (Rear)"] --> S["11"]

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900AT and KE6900AR. The KE6940A installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6900AT (Front) ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6940AiT system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Since this is a transmitter-receiver setup, the below steps are demonstrated using a KE6940AR.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall, and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extenders' grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6900AiT/KE6940AiT).
3. Connect the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) provided into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6940AR is used as the example here) ^1 .
7. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
9. To allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording, use an Ethernet cable to connect the unit's Ethernet port to a network switch.

10. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^2 .

11. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively.

12. (Optional) For power redundancy, connect another power adapter (available for purchase separately) to the power jack of each extender and make sure the adapter is powered.

13. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. For the advanced features of connecting a keyboard or mouse with special functions, see USB Mode, page 250.

1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6940AiT (Rear)"] -->|1| B["DC 12V"]
    A -->|2| C["Serial Device"]
    A -->|7| D["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A -->|8| E["Office LAN"]
    A -->|9| F["DC 12V"]
    A -->|10| G["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A -->|11| H["DC 5V"]
    A -->|12| I["KE6940AR (Rear)"]
    A -->|13| J["Serial Device"]
    A -->|14| K["DC 5V"]

Note: The diagram above shows a KE6940AiT installation with KE6940AR. The KE6900AiT installation is the same except with one less DVI monitor.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6940AiT (Front) ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6910 / KE6912 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910T / KE6912T.
3. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the KVM ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T / KE6912T.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910T / KE6912T's LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910R / KE6912R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R / KE6912R's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the KE6910 / KE6912 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively. The KE6912 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power adapter.

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy for KE6912T and KE6912R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6910T (Rear) DC 5V 10 2 8 9 Optical Fiber Cable 1 10 DC 5V KE6910R (Rear)

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6910T (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6910ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910T.
3. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the KVM ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the primary KE6910T's LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R's LAN port.
9. Connect the SFP modules into the secondary KE6910T and KE6910R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the KE6910T and KE6910R's power jacks respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the KE6910T and KE6910R's power jacks.**
12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6910T (Rear) Secondary"] -->|①| B["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A -->|②| C["DC 5V"]
    A -->|③| D["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A -->|④| E["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    A -->|⑤| F["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A -->|⑥| G["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    A -->|⑦| H["DC 5V"]
    A -->|⑧| I["Optical Fiber Cable"]

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6910T Primary & Secondary (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6920 / KE6922 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6920T/KE6922T).
3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6920R/KE6922R).
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^1 .
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively. The KE6922 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power adapter.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks ^2 .

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy for KE6922T and KE6922R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6920T (Rear) DC 5V Serial Device Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6920R (Rear) DC 5V Serial Device

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6920ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the KE6920T.
3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the KE6920T.
4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the secondary KE6920T's LAN port.
7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the KE6920R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6920R's LAN port.
9. Connect the SFP modules into the primary KE6920T and KE6920R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^1 .
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE6920T and KE6920R's power jacks respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE6920T and KE6920R's power jacks ^2 .
12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear)"] -->|① Cat 5e/6 cable| B["DC 5V"]
    A -->|② Serial Device| C["Serial Device"]
    A -->|③ KE6920T (Rear)| D["KE6920T PrimarySecondary"]
    A -->|④ KE6920R (Rear)| E["DC 5V"]
    A -->|⑤ Optical Fiber Cable| F["Serial Device"]
    A -->|⑥ Cat 5e/6 cable| G["DC 5V"]
    A -->|⑦ Serial Device| H["Serial Device"]

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6920T Primary & Secondary (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE8950 / KE8952 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate its function.
2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided into the KVM ports on the front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.
3. Connect the other end of the USB HDMI KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950T / KE8952T's LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950T / KE8952T's power jack.*
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950R / KE8952R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950R / KE8952R's LAN port; or the other end of the Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.*
10. Power on the computer.

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters.

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE8950T (Rear)"] --> B["Cat 5e/6 Cable"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    D["KE8950R (Rear)"] --> E["Cat 5e/6 Cable"]
    D --> F["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    G["DC 5V"] --> H["PC Computer"]
    I["DC 5V"] --> J["PC Tablet"]
    K["DC 5V"] --> L["PC Computer"]
    M["DC 5V"] --> N["PC Tablet"]

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE8952. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE8952.

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE8950T (Front) 2 4 USB HDMI KVM Cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving alternative for installations with transmitters that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE6900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable (provided with this package) to the USB and DVI-D ports on the front of the KE6900ST.
2. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable to USB and DVI video ports on the computer.
3. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE6900ST to a serial port on the computer.
4. Plug the power adapter (provided with this package) into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900ST's power jack.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900ST's LAN port.
6. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE69x0R's* LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, and DVI monitor into the ports on the console section of the KE69x0R.*
8. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE69x0R's power jack.
9. Power on the computer.

Note: KE69x0R units are required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the KE6900ST on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE69x0 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5 above) to the network instead of directly between two KE69x0 devices and see KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation, page 121 for details.

graph TD
    A["KE6900ST (Front)"] -->|USB KVM cable| B["Local PC"]
    C["KE6900ST (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/5 cable| D["Local PC"]
    B --> E["KE6900R"]
    E --> F["Computer"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation

The KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender is a cost-saving alternative for installations that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE8900S system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminals of KE8900ST and KE8900SR to a suitable grounded object using grounding wires.
2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided between a computer and the KE8900ST. Please use the USB Type-B end of the USB HDMI KVM cable for the KE8900ST as it has a USB Type-B port.
3. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE8900ST and KE8900SR.
4. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard to the front panel of the KE8900SR and HDMI monitor to the rear panel of the KE8900SR.
5. Plug the power adapters into power sockets, and plug the other ends respectively into the KE8900ST and KE8900SR's power jacks. For KE8900ST, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the terminal block according to the icon.*
6. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE8900ST to a serial port on the computer.
7. Power on the computer.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 3) to the network instead of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.

KE8900ST (Rear) ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ DC 5V ⑥ KE8900SR (Rear) ① ⑤ ④ DC 5V

KE8900SR (Front)

graph TD
    A["Computer 1"] --> B["Computer 2"]
    B --> C["Computer 3"]
    C --> D["Computer 4"]
    D --> E["Computer 5"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE9900ST DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving alternative for installations with transmitters that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE9900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminal of the KE9900ST to a suitable grounded object using a grounding wire.
2. Connect the supplied DisplayPort cable between the DisplayPort ports of the computer and the KE9900ST.
3. With the supplied USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable, connect the USB Type-A end to the computer and the Type-B end to the KE9900ST.
4. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE9900ST to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE9900ST and the receiver unit* (e.g. KE8900SR).
6. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard and HDMI monitor to their respective ports on the KE8900SR.
7. Power the KE8900SR (e.g. plugging power adapter between the unit and a power socket).
8. Plug the power adapter into a power socket, and plug the other end into KE9900ST's power jack. Alternatively, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the terminal block according to the icon.
9. Power on the computer.

Note: A KE Series receiver unit is required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5) to the network instead

of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.

KE9900ST (Rear) 1 2 3 4 DC 5V 5 KE8900SR (Rear) 6 7 DC 5V

KE8900SR (Front) ⑥

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE9950 / KE9952 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object using the grounding wire.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
3. Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package, and audio cables into the KVM ports on the front of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
4. Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B, and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950T / KE9952T's LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950R / KE9952R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R / KE9952R's LAN port.
9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the KE9950 / KE9952 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks, respectively. The KE9952 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) where power can be supplied through a PoE network switch instead of using a power adapter.

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's second power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy for KE9952T and KE9952R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE9950T (Rear)"] --> B["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    B --> D["1"]
    B --> E["2"]
    B --> F["3"]
    C --> G["4"]
    C --> H["5"]
    C --> I["6"]
    C --> J["7"]
    C --> K["8"]
    C --> L["9"]
    D --> M["DC 5V"]
    E --> N["PC with monitor"]
    F --> O["DC 5V"]
    G --> P["DC 5V"]
    H --> Q["DC 5V"]
    I --> R["DC 5V"]
    J --> S["DC 5V"]
    K --> T["DC 5V"]
    L --> U["DC 5V"]
    M --> V["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    N --> V
    O --> V
    P --> V
    Q --> V
    R --> V
    S --> V
    T --> V

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE9952. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE9952.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front) ③ ④ ⑤

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE9950ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object using the grounding wire.
2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950T.
3. Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package, and audio cables into the KVM ports on the front of the KE9950T.
4. Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B, and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the secondary KE9950T's LAN port.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950R.
8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R's LAN port.
9. Connect the SFP modules into the KE9950T and KE9950R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE9950T and KE9950R's power jacks, respectively.
11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE9950T and KE9950R's second power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

1. Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["①"] -->|⑥ Cat 5e/6 cable| B["②"]
    B --> C["DC 5V"]
    B --> D["KE9950T (Rear) Secondary"]
    E["①"] -->|⑨ Optical Fiber Cable| F["②"]
    F --> G["DC 5V"]
    F --> H["KE9950T (Rear) Primary"]
    I["⑧"] -->|⑧ Cat 5e/6 cable| J["①"]
    J --> K["DC 5V"]
    J --> L["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    M["⑦"] --> N["⑦ Computer"]
    N --> O["DC 5V"]
    N --> P["KE9950T (Rear) Secondary"]

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front) Primary & Secondary

Diagram showing connection between a desktop computer tower and an audio device via ports, labeled with numbers 3, 4, and 5.

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6900 / KE6900ST / KE6940 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:

1. On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900T / KE6940T.* Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate itself.

2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE6900T / KE6940T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900T / KE6940T's LAN port to the local area TCP/IP network.
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900T / KE6940T's power jack.
7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900R / KE6940R.**
8. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900R / KE6940R's LAN port to the local area TCP/IP network.
9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.
10. Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both devices (See Network Configuration, page 153).
11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network.
12. Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940 and computer. 2. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6900T"] -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| B["1"]
    A --> C["KE6900R"]
    C -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| D["TCP/IP LAN"]
    D --> E["7"]
    D --> F["8"]
    F --> G["9"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940 installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6900T 2 4 USB KVM cable 3 Local PC

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
• For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation on page 88, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network, and then power on the computer(s).

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> B["KE6900AT (Rear)"]
    C["DC 5V"] --> D["Serial Device"]
    E["DC 5V"] --> F["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    G["KE6900AR (Rear)"] --> H["TCP/IP LAN"]
    I["Serial Device"] --> H
    J["DC 5e/6 cable"] --> H
    K["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> H
    L["Internal Device"] --> M["Device with Ethernet"]
    N["Internal Device"] --> O["Device with Ethernet"]

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6900AT (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
• For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.
• Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation on page 91, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: If you wish to use CCVSR and/or remote access with WinClient/ JavaClient, you will still need to connect the Internet Port of the KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT to an office LAN.

It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall, and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6940AiT (Rear)"] -->|Optical Fiber Cable| B["Office LAN"]
    A -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| C["TCP/IP LAN"]
    A --> D["Serial Device"]
    A --> E["DC 12V"]
    A --> F["DC 12V"]
    A --> G["DC 5V"]
    A --> H["DC 5V"]
    A --> I["Serial Device"]
    A --> J["DC 5V"]
    A --> K["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    K --> L["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    L --> M["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    M --> N["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    N --> O["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    O --> P["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    P --> Q["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    Q --> R["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    R --> S["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    S --> T["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    T --> U["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    U --> V["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    V --> W["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    W --> X["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    X --> Y["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    Y --> Z["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    Z --> AA["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AA --> AB["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AB --> AC["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AC --> AD["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AD --> AE["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AE --> AF["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AF --> AG["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AG --> AH["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]
    AH --> AI["NEK6940AR (Rear)"]

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6940AiT (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6910 / KE6912 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation on page 94, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6910T (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| B["DC 5V"]
    A -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    C -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| D["DC 5V"]
    C -->|Optical Fiber Cable| E["KE6910T (Rear)"]
    E --> F["TCP/IP LAN"]
    E --> G["KE6910R (Rear)"]

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6910T (Front)

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and an audio device via USB, with labeled ports and cable connections.

KE6910ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6910ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 97, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["DC 5V"] --> B["KE6910T (Rear) Secondary"]
    C["DC 5V"] --> B
    D["DC 5V"] --> E["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    F["DC 5V"] --> G["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    H["DC 5V"] --> I["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    J["DC 5V"] --> K["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    L["DC 5V"] --> M["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    N["DC 5V"] --> O["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    P["DC 5V"] --> Q["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    R["DC 5V"] --> S["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    T["DC 5V"] --> U["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    V["DC 5V"] --> W["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    X["DC 5V"] --> Y["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    Z["DC 5V"] --> AA["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AB["DC 5V"] --> AC["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AD["DC 5V"] --> AE["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AF["DC 5V"] --> AG["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AH["DC 5V"] --> AI["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AJ["DC 5V"] --> AK["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AL["DC 5V"] --> AM["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AN["DC 5V"] --> AO["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AP["DC 5V"] --> AQ["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AR["DC 5V"] --> AS["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AT["DC 5V"] --> AU["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AV["DC 5V"] --> AW["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AX["DC 5V"] --> AY["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    AZ["DC 5V"] --> BA["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BB["DC 5V"] --> BC["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BD["DC 5V"] --> BE["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BF["DC 5V"] --> BG["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BH["DC 5V"] --> BI["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BJ["DC 5V"] --> BK["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BL["DC 5V"] --> BM["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BN["DC 5V"] --> BO["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BP["DC 5V"] --> BQ["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BR["DC 5V"] --> BS["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BT["DC 5V"] --> BU["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BV["DC 5V"] --> BW["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BX["DC 5V"] --> BY["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BZ["DC 5V"] --> CA["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    CB["DC 5V"] --> CC["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    DD["DC 5V"] --> DJ["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BEX["DC 5V"] --> DA["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    DBX["DC 5V"] --> DC["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BEY["DC 5V"] --> ZY["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BZY["DC 5V"] --> ZZ["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"]
    BZZ["X"] --> BZX["X"]
    BZX["X"] --> BZX["X"]

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6910T Primary & Secondary (Front)

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and an ADS device via USB cable, with labeled ports and cables.

KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6920 / KE6922 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation on page 100, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note

that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.

1. The KE6922's LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a compatible PoE network switch.

2. Power adapters are not provided with KE6922 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE6922 units.

3. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear)"] --> B["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A --> D["DC 5V"]
    A --> E["Serial Device"]
    A --> F["TCP/IP LAN"]
    A --> G["KE6920R (Rear)"]
    G --> H["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    G --> I["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    G --> J["DC 5V"]
    G --> K["Serial Device"]

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6920ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6920ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
• Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 103, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note

that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.

1. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear) Secondary"] --> B["DC 5V"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A --> D["KE6920T (Rear) Primary"]
    A --> E["TCP/IP LAN"]
    E --> F["KE6920R (Rear)"]
    F --> G["DC 5V"]
    F --> H["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    F --> I["Serial Device"]
    F --> J["DC 5V"]
    F --> K["Serial Device"]
    F --> L["DC 5V"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6920T Primary & Secondary (Front)

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE8950 / KE8952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
  ◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:

1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate itself.

2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950T / KE8952T to the local area TCP/IP network.**
6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950T / KE8952T's power jack.***
7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950R / KE8952R.****
8. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950R / KE8952R to the local area TCP/IP network.**
9. Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.***
10. Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both devices (See Network Configuration, page 153).
11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network.
12. Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note, though, that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
2. The KE8952's LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a compatible PoE network switch.
3. Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.
4. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 250.

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE8950T (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 Cable| B["AT&T"]
    A -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C["AT&T"]
    D["KE8950R (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 Cable Opti Fiber Cable| E["AT&T"]
    D --> F["AT&T"]
    G["DC 5V"] --> H["PC"]
    I["TCP/IP LAN"] --> J["Internet"]
    K["DC 5V"] --> L["Computer"]
    M["7"] --> N["Computer"]

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE8950T (Front) 2 4 USB HDMI KVM Cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE9950 / KE9952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
  ◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation on page 85, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["KE9950T (Rear)"] -->|DC 5V| B["DC 5e/6 cable"]
    A -->|TCP/IP LAN| C["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    B -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C
    D["KE9950T"] -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front)

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and ports, with labeled components including USB port, VGA, and network ports.

KE9950ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE9950ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 433).

A few points to note during your setup:

• The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
• In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
  We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
• In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
• If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
• To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
  ◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

The installation is similar to that of KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 118, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

graph TD
    A["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> B["KE9950T Secondary"]
    C["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> B
    D["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> E["KE9950T Primary"]
    F["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> E
    G["TCP/IP LAN"] --> H["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    I["TCP/IP LAN"] --> H
    J["DC 5V"] --> K["Computer"]
    L["DC 5V"] --> M["Computer"]
    N["DC 5V"] --> O["Computer"]
    P["DC 5V"] --> Q["Computer"]
    R["DC 5V"] --> S["Computer"]
    T["DC 5V"] --> U["Computer"]
    V["DC 5V"] --> W["Computer"]
    X["DC 5V"] --> Y["Computer"]
    Z["DC 5V"] --> AA["Computer"]

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front) Primary & Secondary

Diagram showing connection between a server rack and an external device, with labeled ports and connectors.

Network Configuration

This section provides instructions to configure the network settings with a fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. To use the IP Installer to configure the IP address, see IP Installer, page 420.

Note: 1. Both devices are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for further details.
2. In a network setup with multiple units, each transmitter and receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 153, for further details.
3. We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between devices installed on different LAN segments under a same office network environment. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
4. In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
5. If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
6. To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE device, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

To configure the network settings, do the following:

1. Set up the hardware and connect the transmitter and receiver to the local area network (see KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation, page 121, or KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation, page 143).
2. From the receiver, tap [Scroll Lock] twice to invoke the OSD.
3. Select the Receiver or Transmitter from the sidebar menu.
4. Enter the password and click Configure.

The default password is: password.

1. From the Network tab, select Set IP address manually and enter the following:

- IP Address — sets the IP address for the KE device. Key in a valid unique IP address.

Note: See Default IP Addresses, page 154, for the preconfigured factory-default settings.

- Subnet Mask — sets the subnet mask for the KE device. Key in a valid subnet mask value.

Note: The default setting is 255.255.255.0

- Default Gateway — sets the default gateway for the KE device. Key in a valid default gateway.

1. Click Save.

Exit OSD

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard, click Logout; tap [Scroll Lock] twice, or return to the OSD main page and press the front panel OSD pushbutton (receiver only).

At this point, the receiver can connect to the transmitter to access the remote computer (see OSD Matrix Mode, page 183 for instructions).

Default IP Addresses

The preconfigured factory-default IP addresses for the KE Series devices are as follows:

Transmitters - 192.168.0.61

Receivers - 192.168.0.60

Note: For KE89 and KE99 Series devices, only use factory-default IP address if the DHCP is not present or if the initial configuration is done in PTP mode because DHCP is supported.

KE ATC Series Bundle Hotkey

This bundle hotkey allows you to fast switch to any KE ATC Series transmitter units in your network environment using the keyboard connected to the receiver unit. These hotkeys are pre-configured to correspond to the IP address you have configured in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page, see Properties, page 164. To fast switch to a transmitter unit, simply press the hotkey listed below.

Hotkey Rule Example (Tx IP)
Ctrl + F1 Correspond to the Tx IP address in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.61(Transmiiter's default IP address)
Ctrl + F2 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 1 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.62
Ctrl + F3 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 2 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.63
Ctrl + F4 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 3 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.64
Ctrl + F5 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 4 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.65
Ctrl + F6 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 5 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.66
Ctrl + F7 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 6in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.67
Ctrl + F8 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 7 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.68
Ctrl + F9 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 8 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.69
Ctrl + F10 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 9 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.70

For example, to fast switch KE ATC Series transmitters via IP addresses 192.168.2.1 and 192.168.2.2, follow the steps below.

1. From the KE OSD, go to the Receiver Properties page, see Properties, page 164.
2. Key in IP address 192.168.2.1 in the Properties field as illustrated below, and click Save.

Network Properties System Mode ● Extender ○ Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 3600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties Transmitter Video IP 192.168.2.1 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.2.1 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.2.1 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.2.1 Enable Media ✓ Video ✓ Audio ✓ USB ✓ RS232 Manager Address Manager IP Manager Roll 9110 Beeper ✓ Enable Touch Screen Calibration Calibrate Video Quality Graphics mode Video mode USB Mode ● Virtual Media ○ Generic USB device Encryption ☐ Enable User Station Keyboard Keyboard Country Code English (US) Save

1. From your keyboard connected to the receiver unit, press Ctrl + F1 and Ctrl + F2 to switch between the two connected transmitter units.

KE I/O Ports

The following table provides the I/O port use of KE Series devices.

Device Port Number
KVM over IP Matrix Manager (TCP)	HTTP 8080
	HTTPS 8443
	Device TCP 9110
	C●I 9111
	Redundancy 9120
	Database Service 1527
KVM over IP Matrix Manager (UDP)	Port 9110
	Broadcast 9000
KE TX/RX Device (TCP) Manager	9110
	Service 9000
	Telnet 23
	SSH 22
KE TX Device (TCP)	VM 9001
	vUSB	9002
	Serial	9003
	USB Access Mode	9009
KE RX Device (TCP)	C●I	9130
KE TX/RX Device (UDP)	Manager 9110
	Service 9000
	Array Mode	9120
	Video	0xFE00(65024) - 0xFE03(65027)
	Audio	0xFE04(65028) - 0xFE05(65029)

LED Display

Both the Transmitter and Receiver have front panel LEDs to indicate their operating and power status, as explained in the table below:

LED Indication
●AN This ●ED indicates the network status.◆ lights when connected to the ●AN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the ●AN.
Power	◆ lights blue when the unit is powered on.◆ OFF when power is off.
●ocal	◆ lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM focus of the computer
Remote	◆ lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM focus of the computer.

Overview

This chapter provides instructions to configure and operate KE Series devices using the local On Screen Display (OSD). To configure the network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 153.

Invoking the OSD

The On Screen Display (OSD) is a keyboard/mouse-driven application on the receiver used to configure the transmitter and receiver settings. Once the receiver has discovered the transmitter over a network* or Ethernet cable connection, you can use the OSD on the receiver to configure the transmitter.

To invoke the OSD, press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver, or from the keyboard tap the Scroll Lock key twice. The OSD main page will appear (see Press the Esc key to cancel., page 161).

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard; click Logout; tap the Scroll Lock key twice; or return to the OSD main page and press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver. The OSD disappears and the computer desktop screen or the System Login prompt is displayed.

Note: 1. For the Receiver to discover the Transmitter over a network, both must be on the same subnet of the LAN.

1. To change the OSD hotkeys, see page 182.

2. If the keyboard/mouse won't work when the OSD is invoked, see USB Mode, page 250.

Touch Screen Calibration

If you're using a touch screen monitor and the OSD appears off center, you can use the blinking + at each corner to adjust the position of the OSD.

OSD Hotkeys

The OSD hotkeys navigate the Receiver's OSD screens. The hotkeys work after logging in from the System Login screen (see page 183) but not the OSD Configuration screen. Pressing a hotkey will immediately take you to the corresponding OSD screen.

Hotkey OSD Screen Page
[F1] Connections Page 1 in ●ist Mode 184
[F2] Connections Page 1 in Array Mode 187
[F3] Profile Page 1 189
[F5] Push Content Page 1 190
[F6] Pull Content Page 1 192
[F7] Receiver > Properties 164
[F8]	User Preferences	182
[F9]	OSD ●ogin Screen (logs user off)	183

Users can also use the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys to jump to the previous and next configuration pages.

Non-OSD Hotkeys

The following are the hotkeys that can be used without entering the OSD screen:

Reverting to Previous

Users can use the [Alt] + [K] hotkey to switch back to the transmitter channel previously accessed.

Note: For KE6900 / KE8950 / KE9950, [Alt] + [K] is not supported, but the same operation can be achieved by pressing [K] under Hotkey Mode.

Hotkey Mode

The Hotkey Mode allows users to quickly switch from one transmitter to another. Either press [Num Lock] + [-] or [Ctrl] + [F12] to enter Hotkey Mode.

Once in Hotkey Mode, you can use the [Next Arrow] and [Previous Arrow] keys to quickly switch between different transmitters. You can also press a

[Number Key] + [S] / [O] / [E] / [V] to access a transmitter based on its order number in Favorites (see page 185) by Share / Occupy / Exclusive / View Only mode.

Microphone Hotkey

You can switch microphone access between Receivers with a hotkey:

1. Press and hold down [Num Lock].
2. Press and release [-].
3. Release [Num Lock].
4. Press 1.

Press the Esc key to cancel.

OSD Interface

After you invoke the OSD, the main page appears:

KE OSD ATEN Receiver Transmitter User Preferences About Logout Password Configure Back to Connection << Select Config Type and Key in Password

Note: A password is required to enter the OSD. The default password is: password. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password.

The OSD components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Receiver Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the Receiver Configuration screen.
2	Transmitter Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the Transmitter Configuration screen.Note: Receiver must first discover the transmitter over the network for this option to be available.
3	User Preferences Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the User Preferences screen.
4	About About provides information regarding the OSD version.
5	Password Input the OSD password and click Configure to enter the selected configuration screen. See note for password.
6	Configure After entering a password, click Configure to enter the selected configuration screen.
7	Back to Connection	Clicking this button exits the OSD and returns you to the computer's video display.

Logging in for the First Time

If you are the administrator, and are logging in for the first time (Receiver or User Preference radio button), use the default password (password).

For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the login password immediately as shown below:

Password User Password Change For your safety, you have to change login password right away. OK

Click OK and change the password in the dialog box shown below:

Password User Password Change New Password Confirm Password Cancel Save

Enter the password and confirm it in the next field. The password must be different from your original password.

Receiver Configuration

Select the Receiver radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab appears:

KE DSD Network Properties System IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Network Configuration Obtain IP address automatically Set IP address manually IP Address 192.168.0.71 Submit Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 192.168.0.254 Password Configure Back to Connection Save

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Receiver's IP address settings:

Item Description
IP Installer The IP	Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 420 for instructions.Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disable after each use.
Network Configuration	For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain IP address automatically radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 153.

After entering the information, click Save.

Properties

There are two versions of Properties for KE Series, a Regular Version, and a Slim Version.

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Receiver's settings.

Note: KE8900ST, KE8900SR, and KE9900ST are Slim Version.

Regular Version

KE OBD Network Properties System ATEN Receiver Transmiters User Preferences About Layout Mode Properties ○ Extender ● Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9900 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Enable Media ✓ Video ✓ Audio ✓ USB ✓ RS232 Manager Address Manager IP 192.168.0.12 Manager Port 9110 Buffer ■ Enable Touch Screen Calibration Calibrate Disable Front Video Button □ Disabled USB Mode ● Virtual Media ○ Generic USB device Encryption □ Enable Receiver Keyboard Keyboard County Code English (US) Save Password Configure

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 205).
Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP address for the Receiver's Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source signals.If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 205).
RS232 Settings C	Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The default settings are: Baud Rate: 9600 Parity: None Data Bits: 8 bits Stop bits: 1 bit Flow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950 Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Manager Address	Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration changes are made to it.
Touch Screen Calibration	Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears, touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is complete.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into the USB ports.
Receiver Keyboard	Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the Receiver's language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Disable front video button	You can enable or disable the function (select video mode or graphic mode) of the video pushbutton on the front of the receiver.Check Disable to disable.Uncheck Disable to enable.

After entering the information, click Save.

Slim Version

Network Properties System Mode Extender Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties Transmitter Video IP 192168.061 Transmitter Audio IP 192168.061 Transmitter USB IP 192168.061 Transmitter RS232IP 192168.061 Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Manager Address Manager IP Manager Port 9110 Beeper USB Mode Enable Virtual Media Generic USB device Touch Screen Calibration Encryption Enable Calibrate User Station Keyboard Keyboard Country Code English (US) Video Quality Graphics mode Video mode Save

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.SelectMatrixmode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (seeBrowser / Telnet Operation, page 205).
Properties If you selectedExtendermode (above) set the Transmitter IP address for the Receiver's Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source signals.If you selectedMatrixmode (above) thePropertieswill be grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter connections (seeBrowser / Telnet Operation, page 205).
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The default settings are:Baud Rate: 9600Parity: NoneData Bits: 8 bitsStop bits: 1 bitFlow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950 Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Manager Address	Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration changes are made to it.
Touch Screen Calibration	Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears, touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is complete.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into the USB ports.
Receiver Keyboard	Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the Receiver's language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Video Quality (KE8900ST / 8900SR / 9900ST)	You can select video mode or graphic mode for the video quality, the Slim Version KE Series does not have a phsycial pushbutton on the front of the receiver.

After entering the information, click Save.

ATC Version

The ATC version is only supported with ATC models using firmware version v7.5.742 or later.

Network Properties System Mode Properties ○ Extender ● Matrix RS232 Settings Band Rate 5600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Enable Media ✓ Video ✓ Audio ✓ USB ✓ RS232 ● Digital ○ Analog ○ Both Manager Address Manager IP 10.3.66.74 Manager Port 9110 Deeper USB Mode ✓ Enable ✓ Virtual Media ○ Generic USB device Touch Screen Calibration Encryption □ Enable Calibrate Disable Front Video Button □ Disabled Connection Redundancy Edit □ Disabled Receiver Keyboard Keyboard Country Code English (US) Fast Switching 2560x1600 ✓ Disabled Save Password Configure

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Note: It is not recommended to use Matrix Mode for ATC version models.
Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP address for the Receiver's Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source signals.Note: It is not recommended to use Matrix Mode for ATC version models.
RS232 Settings	Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The default settings are: Baud Rate: 9600 Parity: None Data Bits: 8 bits Stop bits: 1 bit Flow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950 Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration changes are made to it.
Touch Screen Calibration	Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears, touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is complete.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into the USB ports.
Receiver Keyboard	Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the Receiver's language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Disable Front Video Button	You can enable or disable the function (select video mode or graphic mode) of the video pushbutton on the front of the receiver.Check Disable to disable.Uncheck Disable to enable.
Fast Switching To	enable fast switching, uncheck Disable and select a resolution for your monitor, or check Disable to disable fast switching.
Connection Redundancy	To set redundant TX IP address, Disable and click Edit, or check Disable disable connection redundancy.

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Receiver's general settings:

Network Properties System Device Information Name KE6940R Description IP Address 192.168.0.60 MAC Address 00:10.74:e8:01:37 F/W Version V1.1.106 (May 2 2014 13:39:47) Serial Number Reboot Reset to factory default Reboot User Station Password Change Enable Old Password ********** New Password ********** Confirm Password ********** Save

Item Description
Device Information	Enter the Name, and Description of the Receiver. It also displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial Number of the Receiver.
Reboot Check the	box and click Reboot to reset the Receiver's settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login information) will be lost.
Receiver Password Change	Check Enable to require a password for access to the Receiver's OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the Confirm Password box.

After entering the information, click Save.

Transmitter Configuration

When you select the Transmitter radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab appears:

KE OSD Network Properties System Internet Port Receives Transmitter User Preferences About Password Configure IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Network Configuration Obtain IP address automatically Set IP address manually IP Address 152.768.0.61 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway Says

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's IP address settings:

Item Description
IP Installer The IP	Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 420 for instructions.Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disable after each use.
Network Configuration	For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain IP address automatically radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 153.

After entering the information, click Save.

Properties

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's extender settings:

Network Properties System Internet Port Mode Extender ○ Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits B Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties OS Language English (US) Port OS WIN Enable Multicast Video Enable Multicast Audio EDID Mode Selection Manual EDID Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Manager Address Manager IP 192168.0.12 Manager Port S110 Transmitter Video Setting Video Type 1: DVI-D + 2: DVI-D Video Quality 5 Color Depth 24 bits Background Refresh Every 32 frames Bandwidth Limit Unlimited Beeper Enable Save

Item Description

Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 205).

Item Description
Properties Port OS	Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system of the computer connected to the Transmitter.OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system language of the computer connected to the Transmitter.Enable Multicast Video: Check this box to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's video signal to be sent out to multiple Receivers.Enable Multicast Audio: Check this box to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's audio signal to be sent out to multiple Receivers.EDID Mode Selection: EDID contains a display's basic information and is used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across different monitors. WhenManualorRemixis selected, the Receiver's OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting to be configured for the connection. Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to KE8950 devices.Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the Connections Page (see page 184).Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (see page 184).
Enable Media Select which type of media the Transmitter can stream to Receivers: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232.
RS232 Settings C	Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default settings are:Baud Rate: 9600Parity: NoneData Bits: 8 bitsStop bits: 1 bitFlow Control: None
Manager Address	Set the IP address andPortnumber of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
TransmitterVideo Attributes	To set the Transmitter's video settings:Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is available for KE6900, KE6940, KE6900A, KE6940A units and will be grayed out for other models.Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can be displayed at one time.Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower bandwidth setting transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth setting sends higher quality video but this can affect network speed.Video Quality: Select the video quality to use. 5 is the highest video quality, and 1 is the lowest video quality. Options are: 1~5.Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes the background image on the connected display. Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the device to beep every time a configuration change is made.
Occupy Timeout Set	Set a time threshold for devices whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy (see Access Type, page 245). If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.

After entering the information, click Save.

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's general settings:

Network Properties System Internet Port Device Information Name KE6940AIT Description | IP Address 192.188.0.61 MAC Address 00:10:74:d1:80:12 F/W Version V1.5.143 (May 14 2020 15:32:39) MFG A1H90430C32 Reboot Reset to factory default Reboot Transmitter Password Change Enable Old Password ********** New Password ********** Confirm Password ********** Save

Item Description
Device Information	Enter the Name and Description of the Transmitter. It also displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial Number of the Transmitter.
Reboot Check the	box and click Reboot to reset the Transmitter's settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login information) will be lost.
Transmitter Password Change	Check Enable to require a password for access to the Transmitter's OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the Confirm Password box.

After entering the information, click Save.

Internet Port (AiT Models only)

The Internet Port tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's Internet Port settings:

Network Properties System Internet Port IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Previous Page Next Page Service Port Program Port 9000 HTTP Port 80 HTTPS Port 443 IPv4 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server IPv6 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Subnet Prefix Length 0 Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server Save

Network Properties System Internet Port Previous Page Next Page CCVSR Disabled Enable MAC Address e0.05.0b.00.00.06 Service Port 0 Working Mode Enable ICMP Disable Browser Service Disable HTTPS(SSL) Enable Client AP Device List Save

IP Installer

The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled, or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 420 for IP Installer details.

Note: 1. If you select View Only, you will be able to see the transmitter in the IP Installer's Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP address.
2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disabled after using it.

Service Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.

• Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
• HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
• HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

1. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a different value for each one.
2. If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the transmitter will not be found.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.

- For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)

- To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP address, 192.168.0.61.

1. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP installer. See IP Installer, page 420 for information.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

- For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.

- To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.

• For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
• To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

• For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
• To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must differ than the one used for the Program port (see Service Ports, page 179).

Working Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.

• Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
• Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available options are: browser, http or https.
• Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 325). Disabling this function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still be connected to.

After entering the information, click Save.

User Preferences

When you select the User Preferences radio button and click Configure to login, the configuration screen appears:

KE OSD ATEN Receiver Transmitter User Preferences About Logout Password Configure Back to Connection User Password Change Old Password ****** New Password ****** Confirm Password O5D Settings OSD Language English OSD Hockey [ctrl][ctrl] Logout Timeout 30 mm (0-180) Disabled Screen Blanker 0 mm (0-30) Disabled Save

Item Description
User Password Change	This section allows you to change the OSD password:1. Key in the old password in the Old password field.2. Key in the new password in the New password field.3. Key in the new password again in the Confirm password field.
OSD ●anguage Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to use for OSD sessions. Choices are: English, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, Korean, Dutch, French, Spanish, Portuguese, and Russian.
OSD Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to invoke the OSD screen.
●ogout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this function, the user is automatically logged out of the OSD. A login is necessary before the OSD can be accessed again.
Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the OSD waits when a session is idle before turning off the display.

When you have made your choices, Click Save.

OSD Matrix Mode

If you set the system to Matrix mode (in Properties), you will see the System Login screen when you enter the invoke the OSD, which provides access to the Connection Page by entering a username and password:

KE OSD ATEN KE630R71 Login Username Password Login OSD Configuration Go to Configuration Window

Note: 4. If the Receiver does not require a login, click Login to system (see Login Required, under Basic, page 230). For information about Extender and Desktop/Matrix modes, see Mode, page 164.

After you login the Connection Page appears, as shown on the next page.

Connections Page

List Mode

KE 08D Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 Channel Name Channel Status Connect KE69162 [VAUS]DeBuG818cRoGs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Exit KE69166 [VAUS]DeBuG818cRoGs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Exit KE8950T [VAUS]DeBuG818cRoGs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Exit KE6940AIT [VAUS] Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Exit K<< << >> >>| Favorites Array Mode Logout Go to Configuration Window

The Connection Page components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Channel Name ●ists the Channel connections available for the Receiver. A Channel is a defined connection to Transmitters, created in the Device Management tab of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 205).
2	Channel Status This field provides thestatus information of the Channel, including the device name of the receiver(s) currently accessing and its operation mode.Operation modes are abbreviated as S, O, E and E for Share, Occupy, Exclusive and View Only, respectively.
3	Search Search for transmitters based on the keyword(s) entered.
	4 Connect To connect the Receiver to a Channel, click the access type:Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Channel has exclusive control over the Channel. No other Receivers can view the Channel. The Timeout function does not apply to this setting.Occupy: The first Receiver to access the Channel has control over the Channel. However, additional Receivers may view the Channel's video display. If the Receiver controlling the Channel is inactive for longer than the time set in the Timeout box, control is transferred to the first Receiver to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.Share: Can simultaneously share control over the Channel. Input from the Receivers is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.View Only: Receiver connects with view only access to the Channels video display.
	5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next pageor to the end of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
	6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
	7 Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as favorites. Channels marked as favorites appear with a heart icon.To add/remove a Favorite, select a Channel and then right click with the mouse to select Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as Favorites.
	8 Array Mode Click to view the Channel connections with a video preview of each source. The list will be shown in groups of six at a time. The Array Mode is discussed on page 187.
	9●ist Mode This option appears after selecting Array mode.Click to view the Channel connections in a list that can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first.Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort.
10	EDID Mode When a Transmitter's EDID is configured, depending on its setting, different buttons will or won't appear to configure the Receiver's EDID for the connection. The following rules apply to the Receiver's OSD according to the Transmitter's EDID setting:Under Default or Auto EDID mode, no EDID button appears as there is nothing to configure.Under Manual or Remix EDID mode, the EDID button appears allowing you to select Manual EDID or Remix EDID.Note: For KE9950 / KE9952 / KE8950 / KE8952, when set to Manual EDID mode with a resolution of 2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz, make sure to enable Reduced Blanking Mode, otherwise it must be adjusted to 2560 x 1440 @ 30 Hz.Click Manual or Remix to adjust the EDID setting locally.To set the Transmitter's EDID Mode, see Properties, page 175.
11	●ogout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
12	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Array Mode

Note that Array Mode is not supported by slim KVM over IP Receivers.

In Array Mode the screen is divided into a grid of panels, with each panel showing the video display of a particular Channel. Right-click a panel and select a mode to connect: E: Exclusive, O: Occupy, S: Share, V: View Only, X: Exit. While the mouse cursor hovers over a panel displaying video, if audio is being sent from that Transmitter, it can be heard at the Receiver.

Screenshot of a web development environment interface with multiple form fields and status bar at bottom

No.	Item Description
1	Next Arrow Use these two	buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
2	Previous Arrow Use these	two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
3	Grid Selection Select a range for how many Channels you want to display. Options are: 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, and 6x6.
4	Favorites Click Favorites	to list only the Channels marked as favorites. Click All to list all Channels.To add/remove a Favorite, go to •ist Mode, select a Channel and then right click with the mouse to select Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as Favorites.
5	•ist Mode Click to view the	Channel connections in a list that can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first. Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort. List Mode is discussed on page 185.
6	•ogout Click this button to	log out of the Connection Page.
10	Configure Click this button	to return to the main OSD screen.

Profile Page

Click the Profile Page tab and the following screen appears:

KE OSD ATEN Administrator: Welcome to KE. Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 Name Description Connect 1 Connect Disconnect 2 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect << << >> >>1 Logout Go to Configuration Window

The Profile Page components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Name ●ists the Profiles	available. Profiles give Receivers access to Channels and allow you to push the connection.
2	Description The field provides a description of the Profile that was entered when it was created.
3	Connect Click Connect and the Receiver will connect with the settings of that Profile (see Adding a Profile, page 270).
4	Disconnect Click Disconnect to end the current Profile connection.
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more Profiles available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Profiles available than can be seen on the page.
7	●ogout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
8	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Push Content

Push Content allows you to push the Receiver's computer connection to another Receiver's console, allowing both to access to the computer. Select the Push Content tab and the following screen appears:

KE OSD ATEN Administrator, Welcome to KE Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 User Station Name Description Connect KE6940R70 Push Content KE8950R72 Push Content - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + K< << >>> >>I Logout Go to Configuration Window

The Push Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No.	Item Description
	1 Receiver Name ●ists the Receivers that can be selected to push the local Receiver's computer connection to.
	2 Description The field provides a description of the Receiver that was entered when it was created.
	3 Connect Click Push Content to push the local Receiver's computer connection to the selected Receiver's console. The local Receiver's computer connection will appear on the Receiver that it was pushed to and both will share access to the computer. The access mode selected at the local Receiver will determine how access is shared (see Transmitter Permissions, page 244 for details).
	5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two	buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
9	●gout Click this button to log	out of the Connection Page.
10	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Pull Content

Pull Content allows you to pull a Receiver's computer connection to the local Receiver's console, allowing both to access to the computer. Click the Pull Content tab and the following screen appears:

KE OSD ATEN Administrator, Welcome to KE. Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 User Station Name Channel Status Connect KE6340R70 KE6340T1 VAUS Share Pull Content KE8950R72 KE8950T61 VAUS Share Pull Content C Laptop Go to Configuration Window K<< << >> >>I Cancel

The Pull Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No.	Item Description
1	Receiver Name ●ists the Receiver names currently connected to the Channel listed under Channel Status.
2	Channel Status ●ists the name, description and access type of each available Channel connection.
3	Connect Click Pull Content and the Receiver will pull the Channel connection to the local console using the access mode displayed under Channel Status.
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
9	●gout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
10	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Chapter 4

Software Installation

Overview

The CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager is a browser based GUI that provides management of KE Series devices over a network. You can download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager for free and manage up to 8 KE devices, or purchase a license for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. To purchase a license, contact your local authorized ATEN dealer. To download the free KVM over IP Matrix Manager, use the instructions below.

Download

To download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, do the following:

1. Visit our website and click Support Center → ATEN Support Center.

ATEN Simply Solar Connections Meet the New HDBaseT 3.0 Solution The Latest in Signal Convergence, The Next Level in True 4K Performance Learn More ATEN Support Center > Tech Support - Pack APDH & Modbus Ltd. Ask Guidance Service Support - Managing Rerby Super Design Product Registration More Product Information - APDH & Product Compatible Unit, 2nd Party General Compatibility Unit, Downloaded Products ... Downloads HDBT³ — 100m VE1843 True 4K HDMI / USB HDBaseT 3.0 Transceiver TRUE 4K AETEN MISTE HDBATE SUPPORT ORDER

1. Under Account, click Create New or Log In.

ATEN Welcome to ATEN Support Center Get quick help by reviewing our FAQ form. Log In Create Now Technical Support

1. After logging in, click Product Registration to register the KE device(s) you have purchased.

ATEN Support Center Name: Standard Online 2017-2018 - Number Supply (Direct Consultation on CTR Products) [Sales] Open Case > List support items not stored up. It might be already closed, please click on "Release of Support" menu to cover the all rights. Type: Unit Weekly Rate Status: Subject Transaction No. Account Membership Function - ATDV Employee Area - User Profile - My Download - Sign Out Support Center Technical Support - EKC - Note Quantity - ATDV Harley List - Unit Party Device - Compatible List Service Support - Warranty Policy - Repair Control - Product Registration Product Information

1. After you have registered the KE device(s), click Trial Software Download.

ATEN Support Center News Product Registration > start Please press "from" button to start in Web Software Connection User Description Customer Status of Function Income / Shipping Amounts Functional Download Service Author U.S. 2019 2020-11-16 If you need to change product registration data please Contact us Website: http://www.aten.net/ Home Partner Portal Home Sign Out Language: English Website: http://www.aten.net/ Autumnship Function ATEM Employee Area User Profile My Download Sign Out Support Center Technical Supports FAQ Ask Question ATEM History List Anti-Pump Device Compatible List Service Support Warranty Policy Repair Query Product Registration Product Information

Note: The downloaded version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager includes full functions and can configure up to 8 KE Series devices. If you would like to configure more KE Series devices, please contact your ATEN reseller to purchase a license and upgrade the license of your software, see page 200.

1. Click the software version you would like to download, then click Save.

My Download FAQ Attachment Download Total Software Download File Type File Use File Download OK/ save if Matrix Manager V2.2.218 Linux version OK/ save if Matrix Manager V2.2.218 (Windows version) OK/ save if Matrix Manager V2.2.218 (Windows version)

1. Unzip the KeManagerSetup_cckm-x.x.xxx-xx.exe or kemanager_setup_CCKM-x.x.xxx-xx.bin file and double click the *.exe file to start the installation.

2. Follow the instructions on the next page to install the software.

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a primary or secondary computer. For software requirements, see CCKM Requirements, page 10.

1. Insert the USB license key into a USB port on your computer. If using a virtual license, skip this step and see Upgrading License, page 200, after the installation is complete.

Note: If you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup, a USB license key is required to install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

1. Double-click the KEMatrixManagerSetup file to start the setup. When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Introduction Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of KVM over IP Matrix Manager. Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen. If you want to change something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous' button. You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. Cancel Previous Next

3. The License Agreement appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager License Agreement Installation and Use of KVM over IP Matrix Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement: SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT Aten International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use KE Matrix Manager (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device; install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purposes of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the □ accept the terms of the License Agreement InstallAnywhere Cancel Previous Next

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.

4. The Choose Install Folder screen appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Choose Install Folder Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Where Would You Like to Install? C:\KVM over IP Matrix Manager Restore Default Folder Choose... InstallAnywhere Cancel Previous Next

Select where you would like to install the program, and click Next.

5. The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Choose Shortcut Folder Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Where would you like to create product icons? ● In a new Program Group: KVM over IP Matrix Manager ○ In the Start Menu ○ On the Desktop ○ In the Quick Launch Bar ○ Other: Choose... ○ Don't create icons □ Create Icons for All Users InstallAnywhere Cancel Previous Next

Select where to create shortcuts for the program by selecting the options provided, and click Next.

6. The Pre-Installation Summary screen appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Pre-Installation Summary Please Review the Following Before Continuing: Product Name: KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install Folder: C:\KVM over IP Matrix Manager Shortcut Folder: C:\Users\iansun\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Start Disk Space Information (for Installation Target): Required: 246,524,078 Bytes Available: 417,676,185,088 Bytes Install Cancel Previous Install

Confirm the settings you've selected. If you want to make a change click Previous to go back, or click Install to begin the software installation.

7. When the process is done, the Install Complete screen appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install Complete Congratulations! KVM over IP Matrix Manager has been successfully installed to: C:\KVM over IP Matrix Manager Press "Done" to quit the installer. Install Anywhere Cancel Previous Done

Click Done.

Upgrading License

After you purchase a license to upgrade the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, go to the Settings - General tab (see page 275), and at the top page, select Click to Upgrade, and then browse for and activate your purchased license.

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions ▼ Basic KE Matrix Manager Version 2.1.202 (2018-02-06 02:03) Serial Number Click to Upgrade KE Matrix Manager Name KE Matrix Manager Description Language English Beeper Enable Disable CCKM Timeout 30 min(1-180) Disable ▼ Network Ports HTTP Port 8080 HTTPS Port 8443 Device Port 9110 ▼ Fast Switching Fast Switching Disable Enable HTTP Port ▼ Account Policy Enforce Password History 1 Disable

Linux Installation

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a Linux server. For software requirements, see CCKM Requirements, page 10.

1. Download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager installation file to the Linux server.

2. Change the properties of the installation file so that its executable by running the command: chmod a+x filename
   Example: chmod a+x kemanager_setup.bin

3. Start the installation with the command:

sudo sh ./kemanager_setup.bin

1. When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Introduction Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of KVM over IP Matrix Manager. Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen. If you want to change something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous' button. You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. Cancel Previous Next

1. The License Agreement appears:

KVM over IP Matrix Manager License Agreement Installation and Use of KVM over IP Matrix Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement: SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT Aten International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use KE Matrix Manager (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device; install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purposes of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the □ accept the terms of the License Agreement Install Anywhere Cancel Previous Next

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.

1. When the Choose Install Folder screen appears, select the location and continue through the installation by clicking Next.
2. After the software installs successfully, a directory provides useful links:

mitch@mitch-945GCM-S2L:/$ sudo -l
[sudo] password for mitch:
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~# ls -al
total 40
drwx---- 7 root root 4096 +-- 14 13:42 .
drwxr-xr-x 25 root root 4096 +-- 14 10:04 ..
-rw---- 1 root root 65 +-- 14 13:42 .bash_history
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 3106 +-- 23 2015 .bashrc
drwx---- 2 root root 4096 七 20 04:49 .cache
drwx---- 3 root root 4096 +-- 13 16:07 .gnupg
drwxrwxr-x 4 root root 4096 +-- 14 13:29 .java
drwxrwxr-x 5 root root 4096 +-- 14 13:39 KeManager
drwxrwxr-x 2 root root 4096 +-- 14 09:58 .oracle_jre_usage
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 148 八 17 2015 .profile
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~# cd KeManager/
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager# ls
kemanager Query_Service Uninstall_Matrix_Manager
_kemanager_installation Service_Manager
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager# 

1. The "Uninstall_Matrix_Manager" can be used to uninstall the software. By default the root folder can be accessed as shown below:

sudo -i cd /root cd KeManager sudo ./Uninstall_Matrix_Manager

1. To check and stop the KVM over IP Matrix Manager service, use the following commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service Stop service: sudo ./Stop_Service

root@mtch-94SGCM-S2L:~/KeManager# sudo ./Query_service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed mode) VAJSM: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/and64 JVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:13:51 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:13:52 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/kenanager-service already exists Sep 07, 2017 2:13:52 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService getPid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Name : kenanager-service Installed : true Running : false Interactive : false Automatic : false Manual : false Disabled : false Paused : false Unknown : false Press [Enter] ... root@mtch-94SGCM-S2L:~/KeManager# cd Service Manager/ root@mtch-94SGCM-S2L:~/KeManager/service_Manager# ls Install Service Start Service Stop Service Uninstall Service root@mtch-94SGCM-S2L:~/KeManager/service_Manager# sudo ./stop_service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed mode) java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed mode) VAJSM: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/and64 JVM: Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:15:01 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:15:02 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/kenanager-service already exists ********** STOPPING kenanager-service ********** Sep 07, 2017 2:15:04 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService stop INFO: Stopping kenanager-service ... VAJSM: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/and64 JVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 ********** STOPPING kenanager-service ********** Service kenanager-service stopped

1. To check and start the KVM over IP Matrix Manager service, use the following commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service Stop service: sudo ./Start_service

root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager/Service_Manager# sudo ./Start_Service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed node) java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed node) YAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 DVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:17:27 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:17:28 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/kemanager-service already exists ********** STARTING kemanager-service ********** Sep 07, 2017 2:17:28 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getpid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:33 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService start INFO: Starting kemanager-service ... YAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 DVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 ********** STARTING kemanager-service ********** Service kenanager-service started Sep 07, 2017 2:17:33 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getpid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:34 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getpid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:34 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getpid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Service kenanager-service started root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager/Service Manager#

This Page Intentionally •eft Blank

Overview

The CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager can be accessed through most standard web browsers and via Telnet. Once users log in and are authenticated, the browser GUI comes up. The first section explains the login procedure and web browser components. The last section provides details for connecting via Telnet.

Logging In

To log into the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, do the following:

1. Open the browser and specify the IP address of the computer installed with the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, in the browser's URL location bar.

Note: If the administrator has configured the HTTP or HTTPS port setting as something other than the default, you must include http://or https:// before the IP address, and specify the port number along with the IP address. For example:

https://192.168.1.20:8443

Where 8443 is the https port number, or 8080 is the http port number, and a colon is inserted between it and the IP address.

1. If a Security Alert box appears, accept the certificate – it can be trusted (See Trusted Certificates, page 421 for details). The Login page appears:

Login Username Password English Remember this account Login

1. Enter the Username and Password and click Login.

Note: Only administrator accounts can be used to log in. By default, the username and password are administrator and password, respectively.

1. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password immediately.

Warning For security reasons, you must change the login password. OK

Click OK for the password change dialog box.

Change Password Password ...... Confirm ...... CANCEL OK

1. Enter the new password and confirm it by entering the password again.
2. Click OK to complete the change and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page appears. Refer to the next page for more details.

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page

After you have successfully logged in, the web browser's main page appears:

ATEN COM XVM over IP Matrix Manager SYMBOLYSIS Display in the XVM over IP Matrix Manager System Status Transmitter Active Binary Time Total 0 0 0 ... Receiver Active Binary Time Total 0 0 0 ... Switch Active Time Total 0 0 0 ... Users Change 1 Profile None None Log Preparing 0 2 4 Information Recovery Status (Recovery) Connections Transmitter Receiver ... Scheduled Profile To be Stacked 1 2 3 4 5 6

Web Components

The web components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Install Wizard This icon helps	you locate Transmitters/Receivers on the ●AN to add them to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (see Installation Wizard, page 209). If a device can't be found, check the Network settings in the device's OSD menu (see page 163 & 173).
2	System Settings Click this icon	to enter the System Setting section where you can configure the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The Settings are discussed on page 275.
3	●gout Click this button to log	out of your KVM over IP Matrix Manager web session.
4	Interactive Display Panel This	is your main work area. Scroll the page up or down to view the various selections. Some items can be clicked to open a settings page, while others provide status information.
5	Instant ●ink Clicking this icon	opens the lower bar which allows you to instantly connect KE devices. Instant ●ink is discussed on page 215.
6	KE & KX Toggle Click this button	to switch between KE and KX Series device configuration page.

Interactive Display Panel

The functions associated with each of the icons on the main interactive display panel are explained in the table below:

Icon Function
	System Status: System Status provides an overview of the transmitter, receiver, user, profile, and log status. Each heading can be clicked to open the respective settings page. System Status is discussed on page 223.
	Connections: Connections provides a visual display of current transmitter and receiver connections. Connections is discussed on page 307.
	Scheduled Profile: Scheduled Profile provides an overview of connection profiles that are scheduled to run. Scheduled Profile is discussed on page 311.
	Sessions: Sessions provides a list of current user sessions. Sessions is discussed on page 313.
	Refresh: The Refresh button provides a way to update the information currently being displayed on the page.
	To Top: This button appears at the bottom right corner of the Interactive Display Panel and allows you to jump back to the top of the page.

Installation Wizard

Use the Install Wizard to add transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches to the CCKM. The wizard locates devices on the network and walks you through adding them. To add devices, do the following:

1. Connect all transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches to the LAN.
2. On the CCKM main page, click the Install Wizard icon (page 207). This dialog box appears.

Install Wizard

Select the device(s) you want to add.

Transmitter or Receiver

Black electronic device with ports and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Network Switch

Black network switch device with multiple ports (no visible text or labels)

CANCEL

NEXT

• To add transmitters and/or receivers, select Transmitter or Receiver, click Next, and refer to Adding Transmitters and Receivers, page 210.
• To add network switches, select Network Switch, click Next, and refer to Adding Network Switches, page 213.

Adding Transmitters and Receivers

1. On the installation wizard for transmitters and receivers, select options to locate the devices:

Install Wizard 1. Connect all Transmitters and Receivers to the local area network. □ Search Local □ Search Subnet Transmitter 1 [1]00-10-74-D4-00-C2 Receiver 1 [1]00-10-74-D4-00-C7 CANCEL NEXT

Item Description
Search ●ocal Check this box	and click the Refresh button to search the local area network for Transmitters/Receivers.
Search Subnet Check this box	, enter a subnet IP and then click the Refresh button to search the subnet for Transmitters/ Receivers.
Transmitter / Receiver	Displays the number of Transmitters and Receivers that have been discovered on the network. Use the check boxes next to the Transmitters/Receivers to select the devices you want to add.
	The Refresh button provides a way to update the information currently being displayed in the install wizard window.

1. Check the boxes under Transmitter / Receiver to select the devices you want to add, then click Next.
2. Under Assign IP Address select an option to configure the network settings, then click Next.

Install Wizard 2. Assign IP Address. Transmitter 1 Receiver 1 IP Range Transmitter ~ Receiver ~ DHCP Use Original IP Setting BACK NEXT

Item Description
IP Range Select the IP Range	radio button to enter a series of static IP addresses to assign to the Transmitters/ Receivers that you are adding.
DHCP Select the DHCP radio	button for dynamic IP address assignment.
Use Original IP Setting Select	this radio button to use the IP address currently configured on the Transmitter/Receiver.

1. Use the Naming Rule radio button to create a naming convention (Title + Number); or Use Original Name to use the name currently configured on the Transmitter/Receiver, then click Next.

Install Wizard 3. Rename devices automatically. ○ Naming Rule Transmitter Title + Number start from □ Receiver Title + Number start from □ ● Use Original Name BACK NEXT

1. Confirm each Transmitter's Name, IP Address, Audio setting and check the boxes to set Permissions*, then click Next and repeat the process for Receivers.

Install Wizard 4. Confirm Transmitter information. Permissions ✓ View Only ✓ Share ✓ Occupy ✓ Exclusive ✓ Login No. MAC Name IP Address 1 00-10-74-D4-00-C2 KE9950T 10.3.66.50 1 00-10-74-D4-00-C7 KE9950R 10.3.66.51 BACK NEXT

Note: See Transmitter Permissions, page 244, and Receiver Permissions, page 257 for information about setting permissions.

1. Click Done.

Adding Network Switches

1. On the installation wizard for network switches, specify the search parameters to locate the devices:

Switch Wizard

1. Please enter a specific IP address and range to discover devices

IP Range Switch Manufacturer ATEN ✓ Search via SNMP v1 Port 161 Community / User Name Timeout 1000 Milliseconds □ Search via SNMP v2c □ Search via SNMP v3

BACK NEXT

Item Description
IP Range Specify the IP address range to search for the network switch to be added.
Switch Manufacturer Selects	the manufacturer of the network switch to be added.
Search via SNMP v1 / v2c / v3	Select to search via SNMP v1 / v2c / v3 by entering the corresponding Port, Community / Username and Timeout parameters

1. Check the boxes next to the network switch devices you want to add.

2. Optionally modify the Device Name of the network switch(es) to be added, then click Next.

Switch Wizard 2. Add device(s) Device Name ○ Model ○ MAC Address ○ IP Address ○ ES0152-GA_11-s1111111 ES0152 00:40.C7.T5.EB.DE 10.0.92.11 BACK NEXT

1. For optimal working with the KE Matrix System, make sure to enable the related network services and click Next.

Switch Wizard 3. Enable services for better connection In order to make sure the switch(es) could work well with KE system. The following configurations need to be enabled before you start to use. IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier Fast Leaver Unregistered Multicast Flow Control Speed Mode set to Auto SKIP NEXT

1. Click Done to finish.

Instant Link

At the bottom of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page is the Instant Link bar. In this section you can quickly connect Receivers to Transmitters.

The top panel provides the Receiver List, and the bottom panel provides the Transmitter List. To create a connection, click a Receiver in the top panel and use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter (as shown in the image below); or drag-and-drop Transmitters from the bottom panel to Receivers in the top panel. Configure as many Receiver to Transmitter connections as needed, and then click Apply.

Instant Link Location All Devices Ratio Normal Active Standby Offline Access Mode Occupy Auto Apply APPLY KX9970T67 Select TX KX9970T68 KX9970T69 KX9970T70 KX9970T71 KX9970T72 VirtualTX TransMI2 GroupTX KX9970T67 KX9970T68 KX9970T69 KX9970T70 KX9970T71 KX9970T72 KX9970T73 KX9970T74 KX9970T75 KX9970T76 KX9970T77 KX9970T78 KX9970T79 KX9970T80 KX9970T81 KX9970T82 KX9970T83 KX9970T84 KX9970T85 KX9970T86 KX9970T87 KX9970T88 KX9970T89 KX9970T90 KX9970T91 KX9970T92 KX9970T93 KX9970T94 KX9970T95 KX9970T96 KX9970T97 KX9970T98 KX9970T99 KX9970T100 Location All Devices Ratio Normal Transmission List KX9970T67 KX9970 T1 KX9970 KX9970T68 KX9970 T69 KX9970 T70 KX9970 T71 KX9970 T72 KX9970 T73 KX9970 T74 KX9970 T75 KX9970 T76 KX9970 T77 KX9970 T78 KX9970 T79 KX9970 T80 KX9970 T81 KX9970 T82 KX9970 T83 KX9970 T84 KX9970 T85 KX9970 T86 KX9970 T87 KX9970 T88 KX9970 T89 KX9970 T100 Copyright (c) 2016 ATEN International Co., Ltd.

Item Description
Instant ●ink The Instant ●ink	bar provides access to quickly connect Receivers to Transmitters. Click the bar to open the panel, click again to minimize the panel. The top panel provides a list of all the Receivers discovered on the ●AN.Click a Receiver and use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter.
Transmitter ●ist Click the Transmitter ●ist bar to open the panel. The panel provides a list of all the Transmitters discovered on the ●AN. Drag-and-drop Transmitters in the bottom panel to Receivers in the top panel to establish connections.The panel size of the Transmitter ●ist is adjustable by clicking-and-dragging its border.
●ocation Use the drop-down	menu to select a location to filter the Receivers or Transmitters displayed on the page.
Ratio Use the drop-down listQ	to adjust the icon size of the Receivers / Transmitters.Click and type keywords to filter/search for Receivers / Transmitters.
	Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Access Mode Click a device	and use the drop-down box to set the access mode: Occupy, View Only, or Exclusive.
Auto Apply Checking this box	allows you to drag and drop devices and apply the connection immediately without having to click the Apply button.
Apply Click Apply to connect	the devices.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit	without connecting.

RS-232 / Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first set up and connected to the network.

Telnet

To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the following:

1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.
2. At the prompt, key in the KE device's IP address with port 23 in the following way:

telnet [IP address] [port]

1. Please press "T / t" to start "TextMenu" The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password.

Welcome to ATEN KE8950 User Station Copyright(c) 2009-2013 ATEN International Co., Ltd. --Press ENTER to start CLI session --Press T/t to start TextMenu : Password:***** ********************************************************************** KE8950 User Station User Station Configuration ********************************************************************** 1. Network 2. Properties 3. System Q. Logout Select one:

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

RS-232

To log into the KE Series device by means of a RS-232 session, do the following:

1. The controller's serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver's default configuration, as shown below:

Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

The Receiver's Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 45). Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.

1. Please press "T / t" to start "TextMenu" The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password.

Welcome to ATEN KE8950 User Station Copyright(c) 2009-2013 ATEN International Co., Ltd. --Press ENTER to start CLI session --Press T/t to start TextMenu : Password:***** ********************************************************************** KE8950 User Station User Station Configuration ********************************************************************** 1. Network 2. Properties 3. System Q. Logout Select one:

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

Configuration Menu

Once a Telnet connection to the KE device is established, the device's text-based Configuration Menu comes up, allowing you to select options by entering a number on the following screens:

Main Menu

KE6900 Receiver

Receiver Configuration

1. Network
2. Properties
3. System
   Q. Logout

Select one:

1. Network

KE6900 Receiver

Network Settings

1. IP Installer [Enabled]
2. DHCP [Disabled]
3. IP Address [172.17.17.34]
4. Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0]
5. Default Gateway [172.17.17.254]

Q. Exit

Select one:

2. Properties

KE6900 Receiver

Device Properties

1. Mode [Matrix]
2. Transmitter Video IP Address [172.17.17.35]
3. Transmitter Audio IP Address [172.17.17.35]
4. Transmitter USB IP Address [172.17.17.35]
5. Transmitter RS232 IP Address [172.17.17.35]
6. UART Configuration
7. Video [Enabled]
8. Audio [Enabled]
9. USB [Enabled]
10. RS232 [Enabled]
11. KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP [172.17.17.33]
12. KVM over IP Matrix Manager Port [9110]
13. Beeper [Enabled]
14. USB Mode [VM]
15. USB Secure Transmit [Disabled]

Q. Exit

Select one:

3. System

KE6900 Receiver

System Setting

1. Device Name [KE6900R]

2. Device Description [Receiver1]

Device IP Address: 172.17.17.34

Device MAC Address: 00:10:74:A8:01:23

Device FW Version: V1.1.109

Device Serial Number:

1. Password [Enabled]

2. Change Password

3. System Reboot/Reset to Factory Default

Q. Exit

Select one:

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Chapter 6

System Status

Overview

The System Status panel is found at the top of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page. This section provides status information about Transmitters, Receivers, Network Switches, Users, Profiles, and Logs. Click on a selection to open a Settings page, which are discussed in the sections that follow.

CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager Administrator Welcome to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager System Status Transmitter Active Standby Offline Total 0 0 14 14 *** Receiver Active Standby Offline Total 0 0 9 9 *** Switch Active Offline Total 2 0 2 *** Users Profile Log Online Idle Total Next Schedule Warning Error Information 1 8 3 None 211 58 446 *** Redundancy Status: Primary/Working Connections TA-TRX RX-TX Receiver Transmitter Undo Instant Link KE KX

System Status

The System Status panel contains six sections that provide information and a link to each settings page. Each settings page can be accessed by Clicking within the section: Transmitter, Receiver, Switch, Users, Profile, or Log. Each section is explained in the table below and the Settings on the pages that follow.

Item Description
Transmitter This section provides an overview of the Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Transmitters that are currently online and connected to a Receiver.Standby: Shows the number of Transmitters that are online but not connected to a Receiver Offline: Shows the number of Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Receiver This section provides an overview of the Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Receivers that are currently online and connected to a Transmitter.Standby: Shows the number of Receivers that are online but not connected to a Transmitter Offline: Shows the number of Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Switch This section provides	an overview of the Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are currently online Offline: Shows the number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Users This section provides	an overview of users with KVM over IP Matrix Manager sessions:Online: Shows the number of users that are logged into OSD or KVM over IP Matrix Manager web sessions.Idle: Shows the number of users not logged into OSD or KVM over IP Matrix Manager web sessions.
Profile This section provides	an overview of Profile and Profile Schedules:Total: Shows the total number of Profiles available.Next scheduled to run: Shows the name of the next Profile scheduled to run.Days later: Shows the number of days until the next Profile is scheduled to run.
•og This section provides an	overview of system logs:Warning: Shows the number of warnings logs generated since the event log was cleared.Error: Shows the number of error logs generated since the event log was cleared.Information: Shows the number of information logs generated since the log was cleared.
Redundancy Status This section provides information about the Redundancy mode. The first set of brackets shows which server is hosting the KVM over IP Matrix Manager database:[Primary] or [Secondary]. If Redundancy is disabled the first bracket will read: [Standalone]. The second set of brackets show the status:[Working]: The server is actively hosting the KVM over IP Matrix Manager database.[Standby]: This message appears when database operations are idle.

Transmitter

Click Transmitter in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page you can add, delete and configure Transmitters (physical transmitters), Virtual Transmitters (multi-source) and Transmitter Groups (multi-video source). The KVM over IP Matrix Manager automatically adds Transmitters connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.

Inverter Receptor Switch Account Profile Log KE Kx Active Standby Offline All Devices Copper L-5FP L-5FP DC1 DC2 KX0070T No Signal KX0070T Copper L-5FP L-5FP DC1 DC2 KX0070T No Signal KX0070T

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Transmitters.

Active refers to a Transmitter connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Transmitter connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Transmitter connection that is offline.
- All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Transmitters by location. Use Locations to limit the Transmitters seen on the page.

• • Click to add a new Location.
• Select a Transmitter and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
• ✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.

Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Transmitters.
Click an option to have selected Transmitters:

• Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 239).
• Reboot: Shut down and restart.
• Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

• • Click to Create Virtual TX or Create TX Group (page 240 & 243).
• Click to set Transmitter permissions (page 244).
• Click to search for Transmitters.
• Click to filter Transmitters shown on the page.
  Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

SFP Module Detection

When an SFP module is used on the Transmitter added, the CCKM can automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as exemplified below.

Copper L-SFP U-SFP DC1 DC2 KE6922T No Signal KE6922T

Transmitter Configuration

When the KVM over IP Matrix Manager discovers Transmitters on the network they appear on the Transmitter settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its settings.

Transmitter Configuration Basic Device Name KE6922T Description Location Unallocated Mode Extender Matrix Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Audio Output DP Analog Auto EIO Mode ATEN Default Multicast Video Enable Disable Multicast Audio Enable Disable Occupy Timeout 5 sec(0-240) Port OS Win/Linux 1 OS Language English (US) CCKM IP 10.3.68.73 9110 IP Installer Enable Disable View Only Video Settings Video Type DP Color Depth 36 Bandwidth Unlimited Video Quality Light Compression Background Refresh Every 32 frames IP Settings DHCP Manual IP Address 10.3.66.60 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway Password Protection Disable Password ***** Enable Confirm ***** RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control None Data Bits 8 CANCEL SAVE

Note: For transmitter models with Internet Port (AiT models), the settings page above is under the “Main” tab. An extra “Internet Port” tab is available. For more information, refer to Internet Port (AiT models only) on page 233.

Transmitter Configuration Main | Internet Port Basic Device Name KE6540AIT Description Video Settings Video Type DVI-D * DVI-D Color Depth 24

Item Description

Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Transmitter.

Description: Enter a description for the Transmitter.

Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a ●ocation for the device. ●ocations filter the Transmitters seen on the settings page.

Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Transmitter will be installed and managed:

• Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed at the Receiver's OSD menu.
• Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over the ●AN from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver connections configured within the KVM over IP Matrix Manager Web GUI.

Enable Media: Select which source type the Transmitter can stream: Video, Audio, USB and RS232.

Audio Input: Use this option to select the Transmitter's audio source signal: HDMI, Analog, or Auto. This setting should reflect the audio setting configured on the computer.*

Item Description
Basic EDID Mode:	EDID contains a display's basic information and is used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across different monitors. WhenManualorRemixis selected, the Receiver's OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting to be configured for the connection (seeEDID Mode, page 186). Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:♦ATEN Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to KE8950 devices.♦Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.♦Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the Receiver's OSD (seeEDID Mode, page 186).♦Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (seeEDID Mode, page 186).Multicast Video: SelectEnableto allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's video signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.Multicast Audio: SelectEnableto allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's audio signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.♦Occupy Timeout: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system on the computer connected to the Transmitter.OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system language on the computer connected to the Transmitter.CCKM IP: Set theIPaddress andPortnumber of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility. SeeIP Installer, page 420 for instructions.
Video Settings These refer to the Transmitter's video settings:
		Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is only available for KE6900 units.
		Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can be displayed at one time.
		Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower bandwidth transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth sends higher quality video but this can affect network speed.
		Video Quality: Select the video quality to use, with the highest to lowest quality being ●ossless > ●ight Compression > Medium Compression > Heavy Compression > Maximum Compression.
		Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes the background image on the connected display. Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.
		To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.
		For information to configure the network settings locally on the device, see Network Configuration, page 153.
Password Protection	Select Enable to require a password to access the Transmitter's OSD configuration screens (see page 163).Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default settings are:
		Baud Rate: 9600
		Parity: None
		Data Bits: 8 bits
		Stop bits: 1 bit
		Flow Control: None
Replace Device Click	Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old Transmitter with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old Transmitter to the new Transmitter. Before using this feature, connect the new Transmitter to the network. After clicking Replace Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Transmitter where the settings will be applied.Note:This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.This feature can be used for both Receivers and Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a similar model.
Save Click Save to	save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel	to exit without saving.

Internet Port (AiT models only)

For transmitter models (AiT models) with Internet Port, an “Internet Port tab” is available for configuration.

Transmitter Configuration Main | Internet Port Basic IP Installer Enable Disable View Only Program Port 9000 HTTP Port 80 HTTPS Port 443 CCVSR Disable Enable MAC address Service Port Working Mode Enable ICMP Disable Browser Service Checklist However Enable Client AP Device List IPv4 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server IPv6 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Prefix length Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server. Private Certificate Private Key Browse Certificate Browse Cancel Restore Default Certificate Signing Request Certificate Browse Create CSR Cel CSR (please) Remove CSRL CANCEL SAVE

Basic

■ IP Installer

The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled, or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 420 for IP Installer details.

Note: 1. If you select View Only, you will be able to see the transmitter in the IP Installer's Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP address.
2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disabled after using it.

■ Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.

• Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
• HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
• HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

1. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a different value for each one.
2. If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the transmitter will not be found.

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must differ than the one used for the Program port (see Ports, page 234).

Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.

• Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
• Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available options are: browser, http or https.
• Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 325). Disabling this function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still be connected to.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.

• For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
• To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP address, 192.168.0.61.

1. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP installer. See IP Installer, page 420 for information.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

• For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
• To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.

• For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
• To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

• For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
• To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

Private Certificate

When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a self-signed certificate and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate.

Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed Private Certificates, page 422 for details about using OpenSSL to generate your own private key and SSL certificate.

Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate, go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer.

Importing the Private Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

1. Click Browse to the right of Private Key, navigate to where your private encryption key file is located and select it.
2. Click Browse to the right of Certificate, navigate to where your certificate file is located and select it.
3. Click Upload to complete the procedure.

Note: Both the private encryption key and the signed certificate must be imported at the same time.

You can click Restore Default to restore any changes made previously.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation, do the following:

1. Click Create CSR. The following dialog box appears:

Certificate Signing Request Country (2 letter code) State or Province Locality Organization Unit Common Name Email Address CANCEL CREATE

1. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the example information in the following table:

Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
State or Province Taiwan
●locality Taipei
Organization Your Company, ●td.
Unit Techdoc Department
Common Name mycompany.comThis must be the exact domain name of the site that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site's domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address [e-mail]

1. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now stored on the transmitter.

1. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient location on your computer

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed SSL certificate.

1. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer. Click Browse to locate the file; then click Upload to store it on the transmitter.

Note: When you upload the file, the transmitter checks the file to make sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a domain name change, for example), simply click Remove CSR.

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them to another. To copy Transmitter settings to another device, do the following:

1. Select a Physical Transmitter.
2. On the Transmitter menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 227).
3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

Copy & Paste

1. Please select the items you want to copy.

Select All

Unselect All

Basic

□ Description

□ Location

□ Mode

Enable Media

□ EDID Mode

Multicast Video

□ Multicast Audio

□ Occupy Timeout

Port OS

OS Language

□ CCKMIP

IP Installer

RS232 Settings

□ Baud Rate

□ Parity

□ Data Bits

Stop Bits

□ Flow Control

□ Video Settings

□ Video Type

□ Color Depth

□ Bandwidth

□ Video Quality

□ Background Refresh

CANCEL

NEXT

1. Select the Transmitter(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click Done.

Copy & Paste

1. Please select the targets you want to paste.

Select All

Unselect All

KE6940T62
KE8950T

PREVIOUS

DONE

Virtual Transmitter

Creating a Virtual Transmitter allows you to create one connection that sources media (KVM, audio, USB, serial) from different Transmitters. Virtual Transmitters appear on the Transmitter settings page with Virtual TX in the top right corner. Simply select an online Transmitter for each media source. Dual Display Transmitters can be added as two separate Virtual Transmitters.

To create a Virtual Transmitter, in Transmitter settings click and then select Create Virtual TX.

Create Virtual TX Name VirtualTX1 Description Location Unallocated Video + Keyboard + Mouse Select Device Audio Select Device USB Peripheral Select Device Serial Select Device CANCEL APPLY

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Virtual Transmitter.

Description Enter a description for the Virtual Transmitter.

Item Description
●ocation Use	the drop-down menu to select a location for the Virtual Transmitter or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 226, for details.
Video + Keyboard + Mouse	Use the drop-down menu to select a KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Audio Use the	drop-down menu to select an audio source for the Virtual Transmitter.
USB Peripheral	Use the drop-down menu to select a USBPeripheral source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Serial Use the	drop-down menu to select a serial source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management

For the A models (KE6900A, KE6940A), the Intelligent Dual Video Output Management feature allows the separation of a Dual Display Transmitter's (KE6940AT) video outputs (DVI:1 and DVI:2) as two separate Virtual Transmitters. These separated outputs can be accessed from different Receivers (KE6900AR or KE6940AR). Receivers can switch between and connect to both Virtual Transmitters independently with the Access Type determining which Receiver has control (see page 244).

To use this setup, install the KE devices as shown below and create two Virtual Transmitters, selecting DVI:1 and DVI:2 as the KVM source for each Virtual Transmitter.

For non-A model receivers (e.g. KE6910R, KE6912R), you can select between DVI:1 or DVI:2, but you will always be getting video output from DVI:1.

graph LR
    A["PC with Dual Video Output"] -->|Virtual TX - DVI1| B["KE6940AT"]
    C["PC with Dual Video Output"] -->|Virtual TX - DVI2| B
    B --> D["Gigabit Network Switch with IGMP"]
    D -->|DVI 1| E["KE6900AR"]
    D -->|DVI 2| F["KE6900AR"]

When connecting to either of the two Virtual Transmitters in the setup shown above, the mouse cursor may reside on the main or extended dual display screen, out of view. Therefore even if you have control of the mouse it may not be visible. To bring the mouse cursor into view on either of the dual display screens, first enable Boundless Switching (see Boundless Switching, page 256) and then use the hotkey F8+F9.

Transmitter Group

Creating a Transmitter Group allows you to create a connection that sources the video from multiple Transmitters to view at across multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group (page 253). Transmitter Groups appear at the bottom of the Transmitter settings page.

To create a Transmitter Group, in Transmitter settings click and then select Create Group TX.

Create TX Group Name TXGroup1 Description Location Unallocated Audio -- USB -- Serial -- From the same PC video output Select a physical transmitter... Copper L-SFP U-SFP DCI DCS IO/070T No Signal IO/070T CANCEL SAVE

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop Transmitters to add or remove them in the top panel. The Transmitters in the top panel will be used as the video source for the Receiver Group at the Receiver.

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the	Transmitter Group.
Description Enter a description	for the Transmitter Group.
●ocation Use the drop-down	menu to select a location for theTransmitter Group or leave as All Devices. See Location,page 226, for details.
From the same PC video output	Enable to indicate that all of the video outputs in thisTransmitter Group are from the same multi-screen PC.
Save Click Save to save the	changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit	without saving.

Note: 1. You can create up to 4 transmitter groups.

1. Any transmitter can only be added to 1 transmitter group with the From the same PC video output option selected at a time.

Transmitter Permissions

Transmitter Permissions sets the users and groups that can access a Transmitter, Virtual Transmitter, and Transmitter Group.

Select a device under Transmitter List, and then next to each user or group click All, View, Occupy, or Exclusive to grant them permission to connect to the Transmitter with this access type. A green block denotes that the user has access.

To set Transmitter Permissions, in Transmitter settings, click

Set Transmitter Permissions Transmitter List IOX9970T Users GroupTX GroupTX1 VirtualTX TransMit2 KE6940T67 Users View Share Occupy Exclusive Login lan test Group Inherited Permission Granted No Permission Unsupported CANCEL APPLY

Item Description
Transmitter ●ist ●ists Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters and Transmitter Groups that can be selected to set permissions.
Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to selectUserorGroup. After making a selection, the list of users or groups appears. Set permissions by selecting the access type (All, View,Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to each user or group.
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by clicking the boxes under the headings. This defines how the Transmitter can be accessed by a user or group. The access type will appear available for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connections menu. To disable an access type, uncheck a box in the heading.All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share, Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot perform operations on it.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has control. However, additional users may view the Transmitter's video. If the user who controls the Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.
Access Type Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Receiver

Click Receiver in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Receiver page allows you to add, delete and configure Receivers (physical receivers), Receiver Groups, and Video Walls. The KVM over IP Matrix Manager automatically adds Receivers connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.

Transmitte Receiver Switch Account Profile Tag KE OK Active Standby Offline All Daniloso KE6000R KE6000R KE6900R71 Cooper DC1 DC2 DC1 DC2

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Receivers.

Active refers to a Receiver connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Receiver connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Receiver connection that is offline.
- All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Receivers by location. Use Locations to limit the Receivers seen on the page.

• • Click to add a new Location.
• Select a Receiver and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
• ✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.

- Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Receivers.
Click an option to have selected Receivers:

• Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Receiver and paste them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 251).
• Reboot: Shut down and restart.
• Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

• • Click to Create Receiver Group or Video Wall (page 253 & 254).
• Click to set Receiver permissions (page 257).
  Click to search for Receivers.
  Click to filter Receivers shown on the page.
  Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

SFP Module Detection

When an SFP module is used on the Receiver added, the CCKM can automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as exemplified below.

KE6922R Copper L-SFP U-SFP DC1 DC2

Receiver Configuration

When the KVM over IP Matrix Manager discovers Receivers on the network they appear on the Receiver settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its settings.

Receiver Configuration Basic Device Name KE6922R Description Location Unallocated Mode Extender Matrix Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Audio Output DP Analog Both CCKM IP 10.3.66.73 5110 IP Installer Enable Disable View Only RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9500 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Extender Properties Transmitter Video IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.0.61 IP Settings DHCP Manual IP Address 10.3.66.85 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway Password Protection Disable Password .......... Enable Confirm .......... USB Mode Mode Virtual Media Generic USB Device Encryption Enable CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Receiver.
IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For information to configure the network settings locally on the device, see Network Configuration, page 153.
Password Protection	Select Enable to require a password to access the Receiver's OSD configuration screen (see page 161).Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB disk drives plugged into the USB ports.Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Item Description
Replace Device Click	Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old Receiver with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old Receiver to the new Receiver. Before using this feature, connect the new Receiver to the network. After clicking Replace Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Receiver where the settings will be applied.Note:This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.This feature can be used for both Receivers and Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a similar model.
Save Click Save to	save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel	to exit without saving.

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Receiver and paste them to another. To copy Receiver settings to another device, do the following:

1. Select a Physical Receiver.
2. On the Receiver menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 247).
3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

Copy & Paste 1. Please select the items you want to copy. Select All Unselect All Basic Description Location Mode Enable Media CCKMIP IP Installer USB Mode Mode Encryption RS232 Settings Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control Extender Properties Transmitter Video IP Transmitter Audio IP Transmitter USB IP Transmitter RS232 IP CANCEL NEXT

1. Select the Receiver(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click Done.

Copy & Paste 2. Please select the targets you want to paste. Select All Unselect All □ KE8940R62 □ KE8950R94 PREVIOUS3 DONE

Receiver Group

Creating a Receiver Group allows you to connect the video from multiple transmitters to multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group (page 243) to a Receiver Group (see Instant Link, page 215). Receiver Groups appear at the bottom of the Receiver settings page.

To create a Receiver Group, in Receiver settings, click and then select Create RX Group.

Create Rx Group Name RXGroup1 Description Location Unallocated Select from single receiver... Boundless Switching: Enable Disable Group Login: Enable Disable KE6900R KE6900R/1 Copper L-3FP U-3FP DC1 DC2 CANCEL SAVE

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop Receivers to add or remove them in the top panel. The Receivers in the top panel will be used to view the video from the Transmitter Group. To connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group, see Instant Link, page 215.

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Receiver Group.
Description Enter a description for the Receiver Group.
●ocation Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Receiver Group or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 226, for details.
Boundless Switching	Use the radio button to enable or disable Boundless Switching. See Boundless Switching, page 256 for details.
Group ●ogin When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the Receiver Group, using the same set of credentials.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Note: You can create up to 4 receiver groups.

Video Wall

Creating a Video Wall allows you to create connections that combine Receiver displays to form a large video wall. Use the options to group multiple Receivers in the video wall. A video wall can contain multiple forms of single displays and grouped displays in various layouts. Video Walls appear listed below Receivers, on the Receivers settings page.

To create a Video Wall, in Receiver settings, click + and then select Create Video Wall.

Create Video Wall 1. Name Name: VideoWall1 Description 2. Number of Displays → Horizontal 2 ↓ Vertical 2 3. Bezel Dimension (unit: mm) 20 20 4. Layout Selection Vidowall Splitter Customized + 5. Location Unallocated 6. Boundless Switching Enable Disable 7. Group Login Enable Disable CANCEL SAVE

Select the number of displays and then group multiple displays to form large screens and/or use single displays for independent screens to create the video wall's layout. Click the bar -- under the display icon to select a Receiver for each display. This configuration should match the actual video wall layout.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Video Wall.

Item Description
Description Enter a description	tion for the Video Wall.
Number of Displays Use the	Horizontal and Vertical drop-down menus to select the number of displays that make up the video wall (a maximum of 64 are supported). Match this to the physical layout of the displays. Click the refresh icon to update the layout.
Bezel Dimension Use the	two boxes to increase/decrease the frame size of each active display.
●ock / Unlock Click the mon	monitor toLockthe (2) bezel settings, so that when one size is changed they all change.Click the monitor toUnlockthe (2) bezel settings, so that each size can be set independently.
●layout Selection	Click + orXto add or remove additional layouts to the Video Wall. The options listed here will appear in a drop-down menu for the Video Wall, allowing you to quickly choose different layouts from the Receiver settings page. Arrows below the ●layout Selection box allow you to move up or down in the list.Three layout templates are available for quick setup. The Videowall and Splitter options can not be changed but allow you to select the Receivers. These three layouts can not be deleted.◆Video Wallprovides a basic full screen layout where one Transmitter connects to multiple Receivers to display the video together as one full screen.◆Splitterprovides a layout that connects a Transmitter to multiple Receivers that show the same video displayed on separate screens independently.3. Customizedprovides a basic full screen layout that can be configured into groups (seeGroupbelow) as desired.*When using the KE6940R inCustomized layouts, only the KE6940's first video port will display video because each port's video source is independent. When using the KE6940R inVideo Wallor Splitter layouts both video ports will display video. Video wall only supports Share, View Only and Occupy access modes.
●ocation Use the drop-down	menu to select a location for the Video Wall or leave it as All Devices. SeeLocation, page 226, for details.
Group ●ogin When enabled	, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the Video Wall, using the same set of credentials.
Item Description
Boundless Switching Enable this feature to allow you to switch KVM control between different receivers by moving the mouse cursor across screen boundaries. This option is disabled by default.When Boundless Switching is enabled, make sure to disable the following settings:◆ On the computer, under Control Panel - Mouse Properties - Pointer Options, uncheckEnhance pointer precision.◆ On the CCKM Main page, click Settings (page 275), then on theGeneral tab scroll down and disableFast Switching.Note:◆ Dual Display Transmitters can be set up as two independent Virtual Transmitters with Boundless Switching. The placement of the KE6940 setup must have DVI-1 as the main display on the left and DVI-2 as a secondary display on the right.Boundless Switching supports both single and dual video outputs from any one computer.◆ For multi-display PCs, make sure of the following:1. All video outputs are aligned in a row with top alignment and the main screen on the far left.2. The transmitter's port OS has been properly set, see page 230.3. Users can optionally group all video outputs from the same PC into a transmitter group. See p. 243.◆ If the mouse cursor disappears under a●inux operating system, execute this command:gsettings set org.gnome.setting-daemon.plugins.cursor active false
	Use the slide bar to zoom in or out for a better view of the Video Wall layout.
	Click this icon to reset the zoom back to full size.
	Select multiple display icons and click theGroupbutton to group the displays into one screen.
	Select a group and clickUngroupto ungroup the displays.
Fit Mode Select how the video wall will be displayed:Height:Fits the video to the height of the display.Width:Fits the video to the width of the display.Scale:Fits the video on the entire display.
Item Description
	Use the RX OSD button to enable/disable showing the Receiver's name and IP address in the top left corner of the connected display. This helps identify which Receiver is connected to the display.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Receiver Permissions

Receiver Permissions sets which users and groups can access a Receiver. Select a device under the Receiver List, and then click under Operation to grant a user or group permission to access the device. This will allow the user to login to the Receiver's OSD menu to access the Connections tab.

To set Receiver Permissions, in Receiver settings, click

Set Receiver Permissions Receiver List KE6900R71 KE6940R70 KE8950R72 Users Login lan test Group Inherited Permission Granted No Permission CANCEL APPLY

Item Description
Receiver ●ist ●ists the Receivers which can be selected to set permissions.
Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select User or Group. After making a selection, the list of users or groups appears. Set permissions by selecting the Operation box next to each user or group.
Operation Click the Operation	box next to each user or group to apply access rights on the selected device. This gives users and groups permission to log in to the Receiver's OSD. If a user inherits its permissions from a group, the box will be Blue. To disable access rights for all users, uncheck the box in the heading.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Switch

Click Switch in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page you can edit and delete Network Switches added to the CCKM (for adding switches, see Adding Network Switches, page 213).

Transmitter Receiver Switch Account Profile Log Active Offline All Devices + ESB152-QA_11-d1111111... ESB152P_173

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Network Switches.

Active refers to a Network Switch connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Network Switch connection that is offline.
- All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Network Switches by location. Use Locations to limit the Switches seen on the page.

• • Click to add a new Location.
• Select a Switch and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
• ✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.
  Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

Click to delete selected Network Switches.
Click to search for Network Switches.

Click to filter Network Switches shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

Network Switch Configuration

When Network Switches are added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, they appear on the Switch settings page. Double-click a Network Switch to configure its settings.

Optionally click Re-sync parameters to automatically update the Network Switch by enabling IGMP Snooping, IGMP Querier, Fast Leave, Unregistered Multicast Flooding, Flow Control, and Speed Mode (Auto for Port 1-48 / 10 Gbps FDX for Port 49-52).

Switch Configuration General Port Configuration Basic Device Name ES0152P_173 Description 52-Port GbE PoE Managed Swi Location Unallocated SNMP Agent Settings SNMP Version ○V1 ●V2 ○V3 NMS IP / Host Name 10.0 90.173 Port 161 Community / User Name private Timeout 3000 Milliseconds Detect interval 60 Seconds CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Basic Device Name	Enter a name for the Network Switch.
	Description: Enter a description for the Network Switch.
	Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a ●ocation for the device. ●ocations filter the Network Switches seen on the settings page.
SNMP Agent Settings	SNMP Version: Select the version of the SNMP used.NMS IP / Host Name: Defines the IP address or the host name of the Network Switch.Port: Defines the port value of the Network Switch.Community / Username: Specifies the SNMP community of the Network Switch.Timeout: Defines timeout threshold in which the Network Switch's connection is reestablished.Detect Interval: Defines the interval in which the connection of the Network Switch is checked for.

Port Configuration

The Port Configuration tab sets the speed mode of each port of the Network Switch.

Switch Configuration Re-sync: parameters General Port Configuration Port Speed Mode ^ <> ✓ 1 Auto ✓ 2 Auto ✓ 3 Auto ✓ 4 Auto ✓ 5 Disabled Auto 6 10Mbps HDX 7 10Mbps FDX 8 100Mbps HDX 9 100Mbps FDX 10 1Gbps FDX 11 Auto ✓ 12 Auto ✓ CANCEL SAVE

Click Save to finish.

Account

Click Users in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Account page allows you to add, delete and configure users and groups. Instructions for adding users and groups is provide on page 261.

Transaction Recover Section Account Profile log Users Name Type Status OISC Language Description Group Administrator Active English Jan Users Active English Jan Test Super User Active English int Users Active English Users Active English User Administrator Active English Cust Super User Active English

• The Users and Group buttons appear at the top of the page.
• Depending on the item selected, either Users or Groups are listed on the page.
• The sort order of the information displayed can be changed by clicking the column headings.
• Three icons in the right corner are used to add users, groups and set permissions, as explained in the sections that follow.

Users

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager supports three types of accounts, shown in the table below:

User Type Role
Administrator Access, push/pull and management of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, including configuration and setting up of devices. Manage Users, Groups, Transmitters, Receivers, Profiles and Video Walls. Configure personal working environments.
Super User Access and push/pull Receivers, Transmitters and Profiles they have been given permission for.
User Access Receivers to connect to Transmitters they have been given permission for.

Adding Users

To add a user, do the following:

1. Click on the menu bar.

2. Select Add New User. The Add New User window opens:

Enter the required information in the fields provided. A description of each

Add New User Username Password Comfirm Password Description RFID Local User What is it? Type Administrator Super User Users Status Active Disable OSD Language English OSD Hotkey [Scroll Lock][Scroll Lc Hotkey Mode [Num Lock][-] Logout Timeout 30 min(1-180) Disable Screen Blanker 30 min(1-30) Disable OSD Title Bar Duration 30 sec(3-100) Disable Welcome Message Enable Username Group Select CANCEL SAVE

is given in the table below:

Field Description
Username From 1 to 3	2 characters are allowed depending on the Account Policy settings.
●ocal User Check the	Local User box if the account is for logging in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager or a Receiver.Uncheck the ●ocal User box if the account is authenticated with a 3rd party external source, such as RADIUS, ●DAP/AD, or TACACS+. See ANMS, page 285 for details.
Password From 6 to 32	characters are allowed depending on the Account Policy settings.
Confirm Password To	be sure there is no mistake in the password, you are asked to enter it again. The two entries must match.
Description Additional	information about the user that you may wish to include.
RFID The RFID field can be scanned to enter the RFID card number with recommended RFID device.
Type There are three account categories: Administrator, Super User and User.The Administrators have full access to make changes within the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, which includes adding and removing Transmitters, Receivers, accounts, preferences, and configuration settings.The Super Users have access to the Receiver's OSD menu and can connect Channels and Profiles.The Users can log in to Receivers to connect channels.
Status Status allows you to control the user's account and access, as follows:Active provides the user with access and permissions as granted.Disable lets you suspend a user's account without actually deleting it, so that it can be easily reinstated in the future.
OSD ●anguage Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to use during OSD sessions for this user. Options are: Chinese (Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
OSD Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to call the Tool Bar function for this user. The Tool Bar is used when accessing the computer from the Transmitter or Receiver side.
Hotkey Mode Select the hotkey mode that is used to step up with the KE Series device's configuration. All operation begin with invoking the hotkey mode. Options are : [Num ●ock] [-] and [Ctrl] [F12].
●ogout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this function, the user is automatically logged out. A login is necessary before the KVM over IP Matrix Manager can be accessed again. The default is 30 minutes.
Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the device waits when a session is idle before turning off the display.
OSD Title Bar Duration	When the accessing a port, the top left-hand corner will show a title bar displaying the access mode and the device name.Select how long you wish the title bar is to be displayed for, or check Disable to not show any title bar.
Welcome Message If you want the Welcome Message to appear on screen when the user logs into the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, select Enable.If you want the user's Screen Name to appear with the Welcome Message, check theUsernamecheck box.
Group Click Select and check a box to add the user to a group.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

1. When your selections have been made click Apply.

2. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.

3. The new user appears on the main panel.

- The columns show the Username; User Level, Status, OSD Language, Description; and Group.

Modifying Users

To modify a user, do the following:

1. In the main panel, double-click the user's name.

2. In the Edit User page that comes up, make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Users

To delete a user, do the following:

1. In the main panel, check the box next to the user's name.

2. Click .

3. Click OK.

Groups

Groups allow administrators to easily and efficiently manage users and devices. Since device access rights apply to anyone who is a member of the group, administrators need only set them once for the group, instead of having to set them for each user individually. Multiple groups can be defined to allow some users access to specific devices, while restricting other users from accessing them. Device permissions are discussed on page 267.

Adding Groups

To create a group, do the following:

1. Click Group on the Account page.

2. Click and then select Add New Group. The Add New Group window opens:

Add New Group Group Name Description Member Edit CANCEL APPLY

1. Enter the required information in the appropriate fields. A description of each of the fields is given in the table below:

Field Description
Group Name A maximum of	32 characters is allowed.
Description Additional information about the user that you may wish to include. A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.
Member ●ists the users that are currently in the group. To add users, click the Edit button.

1. At this point you can assign users to the group by clicking Edit.

2. When your selections have been made click Apply.

3. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.

4. The new group appears in the main panel.

- The columns show the Group Name, Description and Members that are in the group.

Repeat the above procedure to add additional groups.

Modifying Groups

To modify a group, do the following:

1. In the main panel, double-click the group's name.
2. Make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Groups

To delete a group, do the following:

1. In the main panel, check the box next to the group's name.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.

Permissions

You can assign Transmitter, Receiver and Profile permissions for users and groups from the Account page.

Assigning Device Permissions

To assign permissions for a user or group from the Account page, do the following:

1. Click on the menu bar. The Set User Permissions window opens:

Set User Permissions User List Users ○ Group Ian Iain Iain1 Sue Test2 Cod Transmitter KE6900T Select All Unselect All Select All Unselect All Select All Unselect All Select All Unselect All Select All Unselect All Select All Unselect All All View Share Occupy Exclusive Login Group Inherited User Permission Disable Unsupported CANCEL APPLY

1. To set the permissions, select a user or group, then a device and select the Access Type under each column so that it turns green. Make your permission settings for each user or group on each device according to the information provided below:

Item Description
User ●ist Use the radio button	to view theUsers or Grouplist.Click a user or group to configure their permissions.
Drop-Down Menu	Use the drop-down menu to selectTransmitter, Receiver or Profile. After making a selection, a list of devices or profiles appears. Set permissions by selecting the access type (All, View, Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to the device.
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by clicking under the heading(s) next to each device. This defines how the device can be accessed by the user or group. When granted, the access types (All, View, Occupy, Exclusive) for Transmitters will appear available for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connection page (see page 184).All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share, Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot perform operations on it.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has control. However, additional users may view the Transmitter's video. If the user who controls the Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.Operation (Receiver and Profile): The Operation access type for Receivers allows users to log into Receivers, and for Profiles allows a user to connect the Profile from a Receiver.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

1. When you have finished making your choices, click Apply.
2. In the confirmation popup that appears, click OK.

Profile

Click Profile in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Profile page allows you to create, run and schedule connection profiles. Profiles channel specific Receiver to Transmitter connections and can be instantly connected from the Profile page at anytime. Profiles can be also scheduled to run automatically at specific times.

Parameter Passion Switch Document Profile Log URL URL Profile Name ID Description Account block Light Check Lock DSC Profile 1 000000000000002 Directory Na Na Profile 2 000000000000003 Directory Na Na Profile 3 000000000000004 Directory Na Na

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Profiles.

Click to connect the selected Profile.
- Click to disconnect the selected Profile.
Click to delete the selected Profile.
- + Click to Create Profile or Create Schedule (page 270 & 272).
Click and enter text to search for a Profile.
Check the box next to a Profile and click the Connect or Disconnect icon to start/stop profile connections. Check the box next to a Schedule and click the Enable or Disable icon to enable/disable a schedule.
- Appears on the Schedule page, click to enable the selected schedule.
- Appears on the Schedule page, click to disable the selected schedule.

Adding a Profile

Creating a Profile allows you to quickly connect single or multiple Receiver to Transmitter connections.

To add a Profile, do the following:

1. On the Profile page click + and then select Create Profile. The Create Profile window appears:

Create Profile Name Description Permissions Select Access Mode View Only Occupy Exclusive Share Login Check Require Receivers to have a user logged in before connecting Lock OSD Lock OSD when connecting Location All Devices TRANSMETER List CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Profile.
Description Enter a description for the Profile.
Permissions Click Select and check the box of the users / groups you want to allow to connect this Profile. When the user logs into a Receiver, the profile will appear listed in the OSD menu on the Profile page (see page 189), allowing them to connect it.
Access Mode This defines how the Transmitter in a Profile can be accessed by Receivers when multiple users attempt to access it.View Only: Receivers only have view access to the Transmitter's video display.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply to Transmitters which have this setting.
•ogin Check Check this box	to require a user to be logged in to the Receiver before a Profile can connect it to a Transmitter. When enabled, a user must be logged into the Receiver or it will not connect to the Transmitter when the Profile is initiated.
•ock OSD Checking this box	will lock the Receiver's OSD screen when the Profile connects it to a Transmitter.
•ocation Use the drop-down	menu to select a location to filter the Receivers displayed on the page.
	Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to exit without saving.

1. After filling in the information, click a Receiver, select Select TX and use the drop-down menu select a Transmitter; or use Transmitter List at the bottom of the page to drag-and-drop Transmitters to Receivers to create the connection.

2. After configuring the connections, click Save. The new Profile appears on the Profile page.

3. To connect Profiles, check the box of the Profile(s) you want to connect,

and click

1. To disconnect Profiles, click .

Adding a Schedule

Creating a Schedule allows you to connect Profiles at specific dates, times and intervals.

To add a Schedule, do the following:

1. On the Profile page click

Schedule

1. Click and then select Create Schedule. The Create Schedule window appears:

Create Schedule Profile Select Profile Frequency Once Start Date 2022/6/14 End Date 2022/6/14 Start Time AM 00 : 00 Disable End Time AM 00 : 00 Disable CANCEL SAVE

Item Description

Profile Use the drop-down menu to select a Profile to schedule.

Item Description
Frequency Use	se the drop-down menu to select how often the Profile should run:Once, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.When you select Weekly/Monthly an additional drop-down menuappears to select the Week Day/Month Day on which the profile will run.
Start Date Enter	the date on which you want the schedule to begin running.
End Date Enter	the date on which you want the schedule to stop running.
Start Time Enter	the time of day that you want the profile to connect.
End Time Enter	the time of day that you want the profile to disconnect.
Every If you select Daily, Monthly or Weekly, the Every option appears allowingyou to enter how often you want the schedule to run. For example, enter3 months if you want the profile to run once every three months. If youwant to run the schedule once a day, once a week or once a month, usethe default entry of 1.

1. After the schedule is configured, click Save.

Log

Click Log in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Log page lists events that take place and provides a breakdown of the time, user, severity, device, and log information. You can change the sort order of the display by clicking on the column headings.

Transmitter Receive Switch Accounts Profile Log All logs All Privacy All Device All Usage Time Log information Information Profile 2 administrator 26/22/05/14 10:04:30 Near schedule is added (id=4) Information Profile 1 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:54:43 Near schedule is added (id=3) Information Profile 3 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:54:20 Near profile is added (id=80908080808080817) Information Profile 2 administrator 26/22/05/15 09:54:25 Near profile is added (id=80908080808080895) Information Profile 1 administrator 26/22/05/15 09:54:21 Near profile is added (id=8090808080808086) Information Profile 3 administrator 26/22/05/15 09:53:54 Profile is retrieved (id=8090808080808364) Information Profile 2 administrator 26/22/05/15 09:53:54 Profile is retrieved (id=8090808080808363) Information Profile 1 administrator 26/22/05/15 09:53:54 Profile is retrieved (id=8090808080808362) Information Profile 2 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:49:32 Near schedule is added (id=2) Information Profile 1 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:49:32 Near schedule is added (id=1) Information Profile 3 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:37:45 Near profile is added (id=809080808080834) Information Profile 2 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:37:44 Near profile is added (id=809080808080835) Information Profile 1 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:37:32 Near profile is added (id=8090808080808362) Information HTTPS from TE.3.86.73 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:37:31 Session created(Texasolid)=(**********bgp)) Information HTTPS from TE.3.86.73 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:37:31 User login succeeded. Vaming HTTPS from TE.3.86.73 administrator 26/22/05/14 09:26:45 Session terminated(SessionId=(**********bgp)) Information KJX97ER 26/22/05/14 09:26:42 Device power on (id=80-167-426-6D5-6E6) Information KJX97ER 26/22/05/14 09:26:42 Device (id=80-167-426-6D5-6E6) Copper Network is connected Information KJX97ER 26/22/05/14 09:26:39 Device is back (id=85-167-426-6D5-6E6) Crar KJX97ER 26/22/05/14 09:26:36 Device (id=81137-426-6D5-6E6) has been disconnected from Copper Network Crar KJX97ER

- Click the drop-down menu beside a heading to filter events into subcategories. Selecting a subcategory allows you to view only the logs that relate to the choice. The meanings of the headings at the top of the page are straightforward:

• All Severity refers to the event’s severity type: Information, Error, or Warning
• All Device refers to the Transmitter or Receiver that relates to the event. If no device is listed the event refers to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
• All User refers to the username that the event relates to. If no username appears, the event is general system information.
• Time refers to the date and time that the event occurred.
• Log Information provides detailed information about each event.

Click to delete the logs currently displayed in the list.
Click and enter text to search for an event log.
- Click to save the log contents to a file on your computer.

Click to open a pop-up window that allows you to set how many days or the number of records to record before over-writing old log files. Use the radio button to select By Period (Days) or By Records and enter the number to use before overwriting the oldest log files.

Overview

The System Settings are accessed by clicking from the System Status page (see System Status, page 223). There are 7 tabs to configure the KE Manager system settings: General, ANMS, FW Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions.

General

Clicking from the system status page opens the General tab, as shown below:

General ANMS FIN Upgrade Refrumbency Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions ▼ Basic KVM over IP Matrix Manager Version 2.2.219 (2022-10-13 17:29) Hardware Version CCKM1AA2C83B82B54F0C, CCKM586B471751124F2, CCKMB80048E076C57A52, CCKMB13A252B9E47C0DA Serial Number Click to Upgrade KVM over IP Matrix Manager Name KVM over IP Matrix Manager Description Language English Beoper Enable Disable CCKM Timeout min(1-180) Disable Authentication Lock seconds(120~99999) Disable Boundless Switching Focus seconds(0-30) Always Push/Pull Login Check Enable Disable RFID Login Enable Disable ▼ Network Ports HTTP Port 9360 HTTPS Port 8443 Device Port 9110 CU Port 9111 ▼ Fast Switching Fast Switching Disable Enable ▼ Password Policy Password Complexity Minimum Password Length 8 Enforce Password History 3 □ At least one lower case character (a-z) □ At least one upper case character (a-z) □ At least one numeric character (b-z) □ At least one symbol character(-i-1@#DIV&(c)-*+/-)_- Password Expiration Enable Disable Password expires after 0 days(x) ▼ Lockout Policy Auto Account Lock Enable Disable Login Attempts 5 time(s) Timeout 10 min(s) CANCEL

Heading Item Description
Basic KVM over IP Matrix Manager Version	This provides the version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Hardware Version This	provides the version of the hardware.
Serial Number This provides the serial number and a link to upgrade the software.
KVM over IP Matrix Manager Name	Enter a name for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Description Enter a description for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
●anguage Select the language for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. Choices are: English, Chinese (Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
Beeper Select Enable	to sound a beep from the Transmitter/Receiver every time a configuration change is made.
CCKM Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time entered in the box, a user logged into the CCKM is automatically logged out. Check Disable to turn this function off.
Authentication ●ock When a temporary disconnection happens, this function allows the user to retain his/her settings upon resuming connection within the time threshold set. The user keeps the same authentication and display.◆ Uncheck Disable to turn this function on.◆ Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to keep the authentication and display for.When disabled or if enabled but after the time threshold set, the user is prompted to be authenticated upon resuming the connection.
Boundless Switching Focus	When using Boundless Switching(see Boundless Switching, page 256) across multiple receivers within a receiver group or video wall, a colored border is shown on the receiver display currently being accessed (focus receiver).◆ Uncheck Always to only display the colored border for a set time interval immediately after switching the focus receiver.◆ Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to display the colored border for upon switching the focus receiver.
Push / Pull ●ogin Check	Enable to check the access rights of the users receiving transmitter sessions upon push / pull.
	RFID Enable to activate the RFID login.
Network Ports	HTTP Port Sets the HT	TP service port used to access the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. This is the port number to use for a browser login. The default is 8080.
	Device Port Sets the D	device service port used to access the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. Configure this port number on the Transmitter and Receiver to access to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (see Manager Address, page 165 and 175). The default is 9110.
	HTTPS Port Sets the H	HTTPS service port used to access the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. This is the port number to use for a secure browser login. The default is 8443.Example: To access the KVM over IP Matrix Manager with an IP address of 192.168.0.100 using a secure browser login, enter:https://192.168.0.100:8443
Fast Switching Select the default resolution to use so that you can switch faster when changing Receiver to Transmitter connections. If the monitor you are using does not support fast switching the video may not display correctly when this setting is enabled.Note:Make sure to disable Boundless Switching when Fast Switching is enabled.
Password Policy	Password Complexity	This setting determines the minimum password length, enforce password history, and the password requirement policy. This setting is only supported by CCKM using firmware version v2.2.219 or later.◆ Sets the minimum password length, the default setting is 8 characters.◆ Sets the enforce password history, the default setting is 3 histories.◆ Sets the password to include at least one lower case character.◆ Sets the password to include at least one upper case character.◆ Sets the password to include at least one numeric character.◆ Sets the password to include at least one symbol character.
	Password Expiration	◆ Select Enable to enforce password expiration for a specified time frame in days. This setting is only supported by CCKM using firmware version v2.2.219 or later.
●ockout Policy	●ock account after invalid login attempts	Select Enable to enforce the lockout policy if a user types in the wrong password for a specified attempts consecutively, their account will be locked out for a specified time frame in minutes. The default ●ogin Attempts is 5 times, and the timeout is 10 minutes. This setting is only supported by CCKM using firmware version v2.2.219m or later.
C●I Mode C	●I Mode ●ogin Use the	radio button to Enable or Disable command line interface logins to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.Warning: If Disable C●I Mode ●ogin is selected, anybody can login via Telnet with administrator privileges without needing to authenticate, allowing control of the entire installation. For installations requiring a high level of security, it's recommended that Enable C●I Mode ●ogin be applied.
Receiver•ogin Settings	Anonymous •ogin Use	this to anonymously login a user at select Receivers. This option allows users to access the Receiver and connect to Transmitters without needing to login.ClickDevice Listto display the list and check the box next to the Receiver(s) to enable the Anonymous Login feature.
	Anonymous •ogin User	When Anonymous Login (above) is enabled for Receivers, select a user from the drop-down menu to use as the default account to anonymously login to the Receiver.
EDID Mode	EDID Mode Use this drop-down menu to set the default EDID mode for all Transmitters. To set a different EDID mode for each Transmitter, use the drop-down menu to selectCustomizedand then clickEdit.A Transmitter list will appear with drop-down menus to configure each device's EDID mode.
Connection Redundancy Use this drop-down menu to set connection redundancy function. You can set up priority connection with this function.Please refer toConnection Redundancy below.
Pop-up Alert Enable and clickEditto select the types of events to automatically trigger and display a pop-up message.
JavaClient / WinClient For AiT models only, click and drag to rearrange the login priorities of the different access modes, among Share, Occupy, View Only, andExclusive.See Login Access Priority (AiT Models only), page 284 for details.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to cancel the changes.

Connection Redundancy

You can set up priority connection for receivers. When a transmitter becomes inaccessible (such as signal loss or malfunction), this function allows the receiver to connect to the transmitter of the highest priority that is available.

Follow the steps below to setup the priority list.

1. Click Enable to enable this function.
2. Click Edit. A window will pop-up to allow editing.

Connection Redundancy KE KX Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Available TX Selected TX Add > < Remove Target RX New Delete CANCEL SAVE

1. For Alarm Sound, click Enable.

Alarm Sound ● Enable ○ Disable

1. To create a new list, click New. A Priority List 1 will be shown. (Click New again to create another list.)

Connection Redundancy KE KX Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6922T1 KE6922T2 Add > < Remove Target RX New Delete Selected TX CANCEL SAVE

1. Select the transmitters you wish to be in the list from the "Available TX" list and click Add. The added transmitter will be shifted to the "Selected TX" list.

Connection Redundancy KE KX Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6922T1 Add > < Remove Selected TX KE6922T2 Target RX New Delete CANCEL SAVE

To deselect the transmitter, click to select the transmitter from the “Selected TX” list and click Remove. The transmitter will be shifted back to the “Available TX” list.

1. Select a target receiver by first clicking the drop-down menu "Target RX", and select a receiver.

Connection Redundancy KE KX Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6922T1 Add > < Remove Selected TX KE6922T2 Target RX KE6922R New Delete CANCEL SAVE

1. Repeat steps 4-6 to add more priority lists.
2. Click Save to save the settings.

Login Access Priority (AiT Models only)

If your system includes an AiT device, “JavaClient/WinClient” (for remote viewer) will appear at the bottom of the General tab to let you select the login access priority depending on the user.

Javaclient / Winclient Login access priority 1 Share 2 Occupy 3 View only 4 Exclusive

Share: User has full control and can simultaneously share control of the remote viewer. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.

Occupy: The first user to access the remote viewer has control. However, additional users may view the remote viewer. If the user controlling the remote viewer is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.

View only: User can only view the remote viewer but cannot perform operations on it.

Exclusive: The first user to access the remote viewer has exclusive control. No other users can view the remote viewer. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.

ANMS

The ANMS (Advanced Network Management Settings) tab is used to set up login authentication and authorization management from external sources, and SNMP configurations. It is organized into three pages, as described below.

Event Destination

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy BackupRestor Certificates Sessions Event Notification Authentication SMTP SMTP Syslog ▼ General Event SNMP SMTP Syslog ▼ Authentication Events □ □ □ Login □ □ □ Login fail □ □ □ layout □ □ □ ▼ Device events □ □ □ Modify device configuration □ □ □ Device power off □ □ □ Device fiber disconnected □ □ □ Device copper disconnected □ □ □ ▼ User Events □ □ □ Add a new user □ □ □ User Information modified □ □ □ Delete a current user □ □ □ ▼ System setting events □ □ □ General settings modified □ □ □ ANMS settings modified □ □ □ FW upgraded □ □ □ Redundancy settings modified □ □ □ Backup success □ □ □ Restore success □ □ □ New certificate created □ □ □ Certificate imported □ □ □ Default certificate restored □ □ □ Kill a session □ □ □ Redundancy server disconnected □ □ □ ▼ Input Trigger Events Event Name SNMP SMTP No Event Add Now SAVE CANCEL

- SMTP Settings

To have the KVM over IP Matrix Manager email reports from the SMTP server to you, do the following:

1. Enable the Enable report from the following SMTP Server, select the Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error), and key in the SMTP Server IP address and SMTP Port.

Note: The SMTP server used can either be TLS-encrypted or unencrypted. CCKM shall send TLS-encrypted or unencrypted email reports depending on the type of the SMTP server connected.

1. If your server requires authentication, check the Server requires authentication checkbox, and key in the appropriate information for the Account Name and Password fields.

2. Key in the email address of where the report is being sent from in the From field.

Note: 1. Only one email address is allowed in the From field, and it cannot exceed 64 Bytes.

1. 1 Byte = 1 English alphanumeric character.

2. Key in the email address (addresses) of where you want the SMTP reports sent to in the To field.

Note: If you are sending the report to more than one email address, separate the addresses with a semicolon. The total cannot exceed 256 Bytes.

5. Click Save.

1. Once set, an SMTP report will be sent to the recipients for every 100 logs accumulated or once every 30 minutes.

2. An immediate SMTP report will also be sent whenever an error log occurs.

♦ Syslog Settings

To record all the events that take place on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager and write them to a Syslog server, do the following:

1. Check Enable.

2. Use the drop-down menu to select the Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error).

3. Key in the Server IP address of the Syslog server.
4. Key in the Service Port number. The valid port range is 1-65535.
5. Click Save.

Authentication

General ANMS PW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Resture Certificates Sessions Event ActiveClaring Authentication SAMNT SEMIF Reporting ▼ RADIUS Settings □ Enable Preferred RADIUS Server Preferred RADIUS Server Port Alternate RADIUS Server Alternate RADIUS Server Port Timeout Retries Shared Secret (at least 6 characters) ▼ LDAP / AD Settings □ Enable □ Enable SSL Preferred LDAP Server Preferred LDAP Server Port Alternate LDAP Server Alternate LDAP Server Port Timeout Admin DN Admin Name Password Search DN ▼ TACACS+ Settings □ Enable Preferred TACAS+ Server Preferred TACAS+ Server Port Shared Secret (at least 6 characters) Alternate TACACS+ Server Alternate TACACS+ Server Port Shared Secret (at least 6 characters) CANCE

♦ RADIUS Settings

To allow authentication and authorization through a RADIUS server, do the following:

1. Check Enable.
2. Fill in the IP addresses and service port of the Preferred RADIUS Server and Alternate RADIUS Server.
3. In the Timeout field, set the time in seconds that the KVM over IP Matrix Manager waits for a RADIUS server reply before it times out.
4. In the Retries field, set the number of allowed retries.
5. In the Shared Secret field, key in the character string that you want to use for authentication between the KVM over IP Matrix Manager and the RADIUS Server. A minimum of 6 characters is required.

6. On the RADIUS server, Users can be authenticated with any of the following methods:

7. Use the same Username on both the RADIUS server and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

8. Use the same Group name on both the RADIUS server and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
9. Use the same Username/Group name on both the RADIUS server and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

In each case, the user's access rights are the ones assigned that were assigned when the User or Group was created on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

♦ LDAP / AD Settings:

LDAP / AD Settings Enable Enable SSL Preferred LDAP Server Preferred LDAP Server Port 389 Alternate LDAP Server Alternate LDAP Server Port 389 Timeout 10 Admin DN Admin Name Password Search DN

To allow authentication and authorization for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager via LDAP / AD, refer to the information in the table, below:

Item Action
Enable Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow ●DAP / AD authentication and authorization.
Enable SS● Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow SS● connections.
Preferred ●DAP Server / Alternate ●DAP Server	Fill in the IP address for the ●DAP / AD server.◆ You can use the IPv4 address, the IPv6 address or the domain name in the ●DAP Server field.
Preferred ●DAP Server Port / Alternate ●DAP Server Port	Fill in the port number for the ●DAP / AD server.◆ For ●DAP, the default port number is 389.
Timeout Set the time	in seconds that the KVM over IP Matrix Manager waits for an ●DAP / AD server reply before it times out.
Admin DN Consult the	●DAP / AD administrator to ascertain the appropriate entry for this field. For example, the entry might look like this: ou=kn4132,dc=aten,dc=com
Admin Name Key in the	●DAP administrator's username.
Password Key in the	●DAP administrator's password.
Search DN Set the	distinguished name of the search base. This is the domain name where the search starts for user names.

On the LDAP / AD server, Users can be authenticated with any of the following methods:

- With MS Active Directory schema.

Note: If this method is used, the LDAP schema for MS Active Directory must be extended. Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KE Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP / AD server. User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

- Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP server. User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

• Without schema – Only Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are the ones configured for the groups he belongs to in the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
• Without schema – Usernames and Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are the ones configured for the User and the Groups in the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

- TACACS+ Settings:

TACACS+ Settings Enable Preferred TACAS+ Server Preferred TACAS+ Server Port 49 Shared Secret (at least 6 characters) Alternate TACACS+ Server Alternate TACACS+ Server Port 49 Shared Secret (at least 6 characters)

- Enable TACACS+ and enter the following information:

• Preferred TACACS+ Server
  ◆ Preferred TACACS+ Service Port
• Shared Secret 1
  ◆ Alternate TACACS+ Server
• Alternate TACACS+ Service Port

• Shared Secret 2

• Save: Click Save to save changes.
  ◆ Cancel: Click Cancel to exit without saving.

SNMP

General ANMS FW Upgrade Regundancy BackupRestime Certificates Sessions Fines Reinstufion Authentication SNMP SNMP SNMP Trap Disable Enable Primary Server IP 152.168.0.254 Service Port 162 Redundancy Server IP Service Port Community public SNMP Agent Disable Enable Community / User Name NMS IP / Host Name Version Access Type Administrator 192.168.0.254 V3 Enable SAVE CANCEL

♦ SNMP Trap & SNMP Agent

To be notified of SNMP trap events, do the following:

1. Check Enable SNMP Trap.
2. Enter the Primary Server IP and the Service Port of the PC / server to be notified of SNMP trap events.
3. Enter the Redundancy Server IP and the Service Port of the redundant PC /server to be notified of SNMP trap events.
4. Fill in the Community field.
5. Check Enable SNMP Agent.
6. Check / uncheck the SNMP Agents for sending SNMP trap events.

Note: To add additional SNMP Agents, you must first Disable SNMP Agent.

1. Click Save.

SMTP

General ANMS PW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Event Notification Authentication SMTP SMTP Systag ▼ SMTP Settings Enable report from the following SMTP Server SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 Server requires authentication Account Name Password From To SAVE CANCEL

- SMTP Settings

To have the KVM over IP Matrix Manager email reports from the SMTP server to you, do the following:

1. Enable the Enable report from the following SMTP Server, and key in the SMTP Server IP address and SMTP Port.

Note: The SMTP server used can either be TLS-encrypted or unencrypted. CCKM shall send TLS-encrypted or unencrypted email reports depending on the type of the SMTP server connected.

1. If your server requires authentication, check the Server requires authentication checkbox, and key in the appropriate information for the Account Name and Password fields.
2. Key in the email address of where the report is being sent from in the From field.

Note: 1. Only one email address is allowed in the From field, and it cannot exceed 64 Bytes.

1. 1 Byte = 1 English alphanumeric character.

2. Key in the email address (addresses) of where you want the SMTP reports sent to in the To field.

Note: If you are sending the report to more than one email address, separate the addresses with a semicolon. The total cannot exceed 256 Bytes.

1. Click Save.

Note: 1. Once set, an SMTP report will be sent to the recipients for every 100 logs accumulated or once every 30 minutes. 2. An immediate SMTP report will also be sent whenever an error log occurs.

Syslog

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Event Notification Authentication ROUP SMTP Syslog Syslog Settings Enable Server IP Service Port 514 SAVE CANCEL

♦ Syslog Settings

To record all the events that take place on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager and write them to a Syslog server, do the following:

1. Check Enable.
2. Key in the Server IP address of the Syslog server.
3. Key in the Service Port number. The valid port range is 1-65535.
4. Click Save.

FW Upgrade

In FW Upgrade all KE devices that are online are listed, allowing you to select which devices get upgraded. New firmware versions can be downloaded from our website as they become available. Check the website regularly to find the latest upgrade packages.

To upgrade the firmware do the following:

1. Go to our website and download the firmware upgrade package appropriate to your KE device.
2. Open your browser and log in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager with an administrator's account.
3. Click the Settings icon; select the FW Upgrade tab, the FW Upgrade page appears:

Type Device Name Model IP FW Version Receiver KE6922R KE6922R 10.3.66.85 1.7.163 Click to Browse Upgrade Check FW Version

All the devices that are capable of being upgraded are listed.

Note: Only online devices show up in the list. Offline devices do not get upgraded.

1. Check the checkbox in front of the devices you want to upgrade. Uncheck the devices that you do not want to upgrade.

2. Click Browse. Navigate to the directory where the firmware upgrade file is located and select it.

3. Enable or disable Check FW Version

4. If you enabled Check FW Version the current firmware level is compared with that of the upgrade file. If the current version is equal to or higher than the upgrade version, a popup message appears, to inform you of the situation and stops the upgrade procedure.

5. If you didn't enable Check FW Version, the upgrade file is installed without checking what its level is.

6. If you cancel the firmware upgrade, you have to wait 12 seconds before you can disable Check FW Version and restart the firmware upgrade.

7. Click Upgrade to start the upgrade procedure. As the upgrade proceeds, progress information is shown on the screen. Once the upgrade completes successfully, the devices will reset.

8. Log in to each device and check the firmware version to be sure it is the new one.

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed or interrupted upgrade, do the following

1. Power off the KE device.
2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.
3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.
4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the failure.
5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.

Redundancy

The Redundancy tab allows you to set up a backup computer in case the computer hosting the KVM over IP Matrix Manager goes offline. If the KVM over IP Matrix Manager goes offline, the secondary computer will automatically take over operations, allowing all connections to continue without disruption – with only a brief period of 30 seconds when new connections can't be started. When the primary computer comes back online it retrieves the updated database from the secondary computer and re-takes all KVM over IP Matrix Manager operations.

A CCKM supports up to 5 secondary servers.

To set up Redundancy, do the following:

1. Install KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a secondary computer with a USB license key. For detailed instructions, see page 196.

Note: A second USB license key is required if you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup.

1. On the secondary computer, log in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, click and go to the Redundancy tab.

General ANMS FIV Upgrade Redundancy BackupRestore Certificates Sessions Mode Primary Secondary Server ID 94C69157EBD90000 Server Status -- Redundancy ID: Enable Redundancy Primary Server IP SAVE CANCEL

1. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Secondary radio button.

2. Use the Primary Server IP drop-down menu to select the primary IP address.

3. Click Save.
4. Redundancy is now running on the secondary computer.
5. On the primary computer, log in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, click and go to the Redundancy tab.

General ANMS PUI Upgrade Redundancy BackupRestries Certificates Session Mode Primary: Secondary Primary Server IP 10.3.95.73 Server ID: 94069157EBD90000 Server Status -- Redundancy ID Enable Redundancy 1st Secondary Server IP 2nd Secondary Server IP 3rd Secondary Server IP 4th Secondary Server IP 5th Secondary Server IP SAVE CANCEL

1. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Primary radio button.
2. Use the Secondary Server IP drop-down menu to select the secondary IP address.
3. Enter the Username and Password of the secondary computer's local administrator account.
4. Click Save.
5. Information about the Redundancy status can be found in the event log (see Log, page 274 for details).

Backup / Restore

The Backup/Restore tab is divided into three panels: Backup, Restore, and Export Device List:

General ANMS FV Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions ▼ Backup BACKUP □ Add Password ▼ Restore Password ▼ Export Device List EXPORT

The operations to perform backup/restore procedures are described in the table below and in the section that follows:

Procedure Operation
Backup Backs up	the KVM over IP Matrix Manager configuration – including profile and schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings.
Restore Deletes	the current profile and schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings; then restores those settings to the values that exist in the previously saved backup file.
Export Device●ist	Clicking Export allows you to save a file with a complete list of the devices added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The file contains the ID, name, description and IP address of each transmitter and receiver. An Existing column also lists if the device is available: Yes, it exists and is available, or No, it is offline or has been removed.

Backup

To back up system configuration settings, do the following:

1. (Optional) In the Backup panel, check Add Password, and provide a password for the backup file.

Note: Providing a password is a security feature – if you provide a password, you will need to give the same password in order to restore the configuration settings from this file.

1. Click Backup.
2. In the dialog box that comes up, Click Save to save the configuration file (System.conf) to a location on your hard disk.
3. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file and click Save.

Restore

To restore system configuration settings, do the following:

1. In the Restore panel, click Browse.
2. Navigate to the directory where the backup file is located and select it.
3. When you return to the Backup/Restore page enter the password you set when the backup file was created.

Note: If you did not set a password for the file, leave the field blank.

1. Click Restore.
2. Click OK to confirm that you want to restore the configuration data.

When the Restore procedure is in process, a message stating that the KVM over IP Matrix Manager will restart will appear. After a short while the KVM over IP Matrix Manager closes and refreshes at the log in screen. When it comes back up the configuration settings that were restored from the backup file are in effect.

Certificates

This tab provides information about Private Certificates:

General ANMS FW Upgrade Restundancy Backup/Retios Certificates Sessions
	Issued To
	Common Name (CN)	ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD
	Organization (O)	ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD
	Organization Unit (OU)	R&D
	Country (C)	TW
	State or Province (ST)	New Taipei City
	Locality (L)	Sajah District
	Email Address (E)	[e-mail]
	Serial Number	08-10-10 AS CA 7F 40 BS 3B
	Issued By
	Common Name (CN)	ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD
	Organization (O)	ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD
	Organization Unit (OU)	R&D
	Validity
	Issued On	2016/03/17 05:40:43
	Expires On	2026/03/16-05:40:43
	Fingerprints
	SHA1 Fingerprint	EE 55 7F 72 13 B7 A9 40 00 32 E8 A0 AB 8C 9F 8B C8 65 65 A5
	MDS Fingerprint	A6 C8 B2 69 72 9C 05 B4 51 78 2E 43 S1 T9 9B EB

Private Certificate

When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a self-signed certificate; and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate.

- Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed Private Certificates, page 422 for details about using OpenSSL to generate your own private key and SSL certificate.

- Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate, go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate.

After the CA sends you the certificate and private encryption key, save them to a convenient location on your computer.

- Importing the Private Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

1. Click Import from the bottom of the Private Certificate page, shown here:

NEW GET CSR IMPORT RESTORE DEFAULT

1. Click Browse to the right of Certificate Filename; and browse to where your certificate file is located; and select it.
2. Click Import to complete the procedure.

Note: Clicking Restore Defaults returns the device to using the default ATEN certificate.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation do the following:

1. Click New. The following dialog box appears:

New Certificate Country (2 letter code) State or Province (ST) Locality (L) Organization (O) Organization Unit (OU) Common Name (CN) Email Address (E) CANCEL CREATE

1. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the example information in the following table:

Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
Information Example
State or Province Taiwan
●locality Taipei
Organization Your Company,	●td.
Organization Unit Tech Department
Common Name mycompany.com	Note: This must be the exact domain name of the site that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site's domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address [e-mail]

1. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now stored on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

1. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient location on your computer.

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed SSL certificate.

1. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer. Click Import to locate the file; then click Import to store it on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

Note: When you upload the file, the KVM over IP Matrix Manager checks the file to make sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a domain name change, for example), simply click Restore Defaults.

Sessions

The Sessions tab shows all of the users that are logged into KVM over IP Matrix Manager and OSD sessions and provides information concerning the “who, where and when” of each session. This page also gives the administrator the option of forcing a user logout by selecting the user and clicking Kill Session next to each user.

General AMCS P/V Upgrade Instalency BackupFeature Certificate Session User Type Service IP Logit Time Last Address Operation Administrator Administrator HTTPS 16.318.72 2022/01/14 17:14:13 28.22/06/14 17:30:04 KIT System

• Username refers to the user that logged in to establish a session.
  ◆ User Type refers to the account type of the user.
• Service refers to how the user logged into their session – via KVM over IP Matrix Manager, Command Line, or OSD.
• IP refers to the IP address from which the user has logged in.
• Login Time refers to the date/time that the user logged into the session.
• Last Access refers to the last time the user session was active.
  ◆ Operation provides the Kill Session button to force a user logout.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Chapter 8

Connections

Overview

The Connections panel is found on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below System Status. Connections provides a diagram of current Transmitter to Receiver connections. Before connections are established the panel appears blank, as shown below. To connect Receivers to Transmitters, use the Instant Link panel (page 215), or create a connection Profile (page 269).

When connections are made, clicking a device in the left column provides a way to view the connection, hovering the mouse cursor over the connection diagram in the right column allows you to disconnect the device, as explained in the sections that follows.

ATEN CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager User 1 Profile 6 Tools 3 Profile 1 8 hrs Log 13 242 425 Requiring Status (Turnover) Connections Transmitter Receiver T3-PR REV. TS Access

Connections

When Receivers connect to Transmitters, they appear in the Connections panel. There are two columns – each lists either Transmitters or Receivers. The columns can be swapped by clicking the TX-RX or RX-TX button. Devices in the left column can be clicked to display their connection to devices, shown in the right column. Connections, shown in the right column, can be disconnected by clicking the X over the connection diagram.

graph TD
    A["KE6940T67"] --> B["Receiver"]
    C["KE8950T61"] --> B
    D["KE6940T64"] --> B
    E["KE6940T60"] --> B
    B --> F["KE6000R71"]
    B --> G["KE6950R72"]
    F --> H["Administrator (share)"]
    G --> I["Administrator (Occupy)"]

Item Description
	On the heading bar under Connections, click this icon to change the sort order of the Transmitters or Receivers listed in the left column.
•eft Column Click a device in	the left column to view its connection in the right column. A diagram to its connected device(s) appears in the right column.
Right Column The right column	displays a connection diagram when a device in the left column is selected. Move the mouse cursor over the diagram and click X to disconnect the devices. This column also shows the user and access type (Exclusive, Occupy, Share, View Only) used to establish the connection.
Transmitter •ists Transmitters	that are online and connected to Receivers.
Receiver •ists Receivers that	are online and connected to Transmitters.
TX-RX	Click to view Transmitter to Receiver connections. This will list Transmitters in the left column so that they can be selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the right column.
RX-TX	Click to view Receiver to Transmitter connections. This will list Receivers in the left column so that they can be selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the right column.Click this icon to Refresh the Transmitters and Receivers list in Connections panel.
Undo Click this icon to undo	the most recent disconnection.

Based on the different access types, users attempting to connect to device ports that are already being accessed by another user may or may not be able to connect. See the table below for scenarios where users are granted (O) or denied access (X).

New ConnectAttemptCurrentlyConnected	Exclusive Share Occupy View	Only
EXC•USIVE	XXXX
Share X O X O
Occupy X X O O
View Only X O O O
None O O O O

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Overview

The Scheduled Profile panel is found on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below Connections. Scheduled Profiles displays connection profiles that have been scheduled. Click Go to Schedule to edit and create profile schedules (page 269). To create Profiles, see page 270.

ATEN CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager 1 6 3 Profile 1 8 hrs 13 242 425 Refrasency Status (Switching) Connections Transmitter Receiver Scale Scheduled Profile Profile Description Start End Status Profile 1 2022-06-14 02:00 2022-06-17 16:00 8 hrs Profile 2 2022-06-14 01:00 2022-06-17 22:00 7 days # # # # # # Status

Item Description
Headings	The headings provide the schedules: Name, Description, Start, End, and Status. Start and End show the time/date the profile is scheduled to begin and end. Status displays the number of days until to the next scheduled run.
Go to Schedule	Clicking Go to Schedule opens the Profile settings page which allows you to create and edit connection profiles. See Profile, page 269 for details.
	Click this icon to Refresh the connections list in the right column.
Undo Click this icon to undo	the most recent disconnection.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Chapter 10 Sessions

Overview

The Sessions panel is found at the bottom of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below Scheduled Profile. Sessions displays information about users logged into devices and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. Click Go to Sessions to view the settings page (see page 305).

ATEN CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager achronatorial receives to the KVM user IP Matrix Manager Transmitter Receiver Schedule Profile Create Schedule Profile Description Start End Status Profile 1 2022-08-14 12:30 2022-09-17 15:00 8 ms Profile 2 2022-08-14 11:30 2022-08-17 22:00 7 ms Settings User Type Service Login Time Last Access Operation Administrator Administration NETS 11.3.16.23 2022/08/12 17:13 2022/08/13 17:27 KB Sessions

Item Description
Headings The headings provide information about each user session:Username,User Level,Service,IP,Login Time, andLast Access. For more details about each heading, see Sessions, page 305.
Go to Sessions Clicking Go to Sessions opens the Sessions settings page which provides a page displaying the same information found in this panel.
	Click this icon to Refresh the Sessions list.
Kill Session	Click to kill and stop operation from the selected session.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Overview

The ATEN Matrix Link is a mobile app that allows users to access the CCKM server from an iPad for convenient remote monitoring and management.

Requirements

Before using ATEN Matrix Link, make sure your iPad meets the following requirements:

• Running iPadOS 9.0 or later
• Has ATEN Matrix Link app installed, available from the App Store.
• Connected to the same network as the CCKM server.

IMPORTANT: To use ATEN Matrix Link, the CCKM server's license must be activated.

Accessing CCKM

1. On the ATEN Matrix Link app, enter the IP address and service port value of the CCKM server, and tap Connect, as exemplified below.

KVM over IP Matrix System Instant link CCKM IP CONNECT

1. The account selection page appears, displaying all of the CCKM server's user accounts. Select the user account you want to use for accessing the CCKM server. Upon selecting, you must enter the password of the account and tap Login.

Change CCKM IP Alfred Sim Administrator Harry Weng User Suzuki Chen Superuser Login

1. Once successfully logged in, the ATEN Matrix Link app's main page appears, resembling the CCKM server's Instant Link function, as exemplified below.

KVM over IP Matrix System Instant link Active Stand-by Off-line RECEIVER Single Group Share ger Daisy Chain UI RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name TRANSMITTER Single Group ger Daisy Chain UI TX Name TX Name TX Name TX Name TX Name TX Name ger Daisy Chain UI

Monitoring

Adjusting Preview Size

For easy monitoring, users can tap 1 of the 3 following icons to display the preview of transmitters and/or receivers in small, medium, or large images, as described below.

Preview Size Description
•arge	Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in large images (2 per row)
Medium	Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in medium images (4 per row)
Small	Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in small images (6 per row)

Searching for a Device

To search for a particular transmitter and/or receiver device, simply enter the name or IP address of the transmitter and/or receiver you want to search for and tap the search icon.

Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection

To check which transmitter a receiver is currently connected to, simply long-tap that receiver until the name of the transmitter or Tx group it is connected to is displayed, as exemplified below.

RECEIVER TX Name Disconnect

You can optionally disconnect the receiver from the transmitter by tapping Disconnect.

If no transmitter is currently connected, No connection is displayed, as exemplified below.

No connection. Disconnect RX Name

Connecting Tx-Rx

To connect a transmitter or Tx group to the desired receiver or Rx group, do the following:

1. First, select the access privilege you want the receiver to control the transmitter with from the following drop-down list.

KVM over IP Matrix System Instant link Active Stand-by Off-line CEIVER Single Group Share RX Name RX Name

1. Tap and drag the desired transmitter device or Tx group to the desired receiver or Rx group, as illustrated below.

RECEIVER Single Group Share RX Name RX Name ger Daisy Chain UI RX Name RX Name ger Daisy Chain UI RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name TRANSMITTER Single Group

Access Types

Based on the different access types, users attempting to connect to device ports that are already being accessed by another user may or may not be able to connect. See the table below for scenarios where users are granted (O) or denied access (X).

New ConnectAttemptCurrentlyConnected	Exclusive Share Occupy View	Only
EXC•USIVE	XXXX
Share X O X O
Occupy X X O O
View Only X O O O
None O O O O

Logout

To log out of the user account, currently used to access the CCKM server, tap Menu and then tap Log out.

KVM over IP Matrix System Instant link RECEIVER APP Version V1.000.23.4 CCKM IP 192.10.1.2 Log out

Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction

If the video source(s) of your AiT model is connected, the remote viewer can be used to access these video source(s) as if it were your local system.

A window will be presented and the remote server is displayed inside this window.

• You can maximize the window, drag the borders to resize the window and use the scrollbars to move around the screen.
• Due to net lag, there might be a slight delay before your keystrokes show up. You may also have to wait a bit for the remote mouse to catch up to your local mouse before you click.
• Due to net lag, or insufficient computing power on the local machine, some images, especially motion images, may display poorly.

There are several ways you can access the remote servers and are listed below:

1. Windows viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
2. Java viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
3. Windows Client Viewer AP (without browser). On the browser login page, a “Download Windows Client AP” is available. Refer to The Windows/Java Client AP on page 324 for more information.
4. Java Client Viewer AP (without browser). Since the control is identical to the windows client viewer, refer to The Control Panel on page 327 on the control of the viewer interface.

Note: Audio is not supported when the AiT models are accessed via WinClient and JavaClient.

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access)

The Windows and Java Client Viewer is accessible via a web browser.

ATEN KE6940AIT Remote Viewer English Windows Client Java Client Login OR Download Windows Client AP Download Java Client AP Copyright (c) 2019 ATEN International Co.,Ltd.

At the login screen of the Remote Viewer page, enter the username/password and click Login. You can change the login language by using the language drop-down menu.

A second or two after, the video source(s)' display appears as a window on your desktop:

No signal. | 1

The control/access is laid out in the control panel. Refer to The Control Panel on page 327 for access/control information.

By default, if you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Windows Client viewer is used. If you use other browsers, the Java Client viewer is used.

If you manually set the preference to Java Client when you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Java Client viewer is also used.

The Windows/Java Client AP

Download

To download the stand-alone Windows or Java Client program, go to the browser login page and click the Download Windows Client AP or Download Java Client AP button.

KE6940AIT Remote Viewer English Windows Client Java Client Login OR Download Windows Client AP Download Java Client AP Copyright © 2019 ATEN International Co.,Ltd.

Note: Make sure your system has JRE 6 Update 3 or later installed. Java is available for free download from Sun's Java web site (http://java.sun.com).

Starting Up

For the first time running the AP, right-click the Windows/Java Client AP and click “Run as administrator” to start.

The Client Connection Screen is shown below and each components are described in the table. Windows Client will be the example shown here.

Windclient File Help Server List: Name IP Status KE6940AIT 10.3.41.182 (fe80::267d:4diff:fe-fb:4c78) Available Server IP: 10.3.41.182 Port: 9000 Connect Switch to remote view

Item Description
Server ●ist When you run	the Client program, it automatically searches the user's local ●AN segment for AiT units, and lists whichever ones it finds in this box. If you want to connect to one of these units, double-click to connect.
Server If the AiT unit you	wish to connect to is at a remote location, it will not be found on your ●AN. You can enter its IP address and port yourself.If you don't know the Port number, contact the Administrator.When the IP address and Port number for the unit you wish to connect to have been specified, click Connect to start the connection.
Connect Starts connecting	to the AiT unit.
Disconnect These buttons	become active once you log into the AiT unit.
Switch to remote view
Message panel The blank	field on the right of the Server section shows the current status of the server connection.

1. Double-click the unit. When the unit is connected, a login window appears:

Login: 10.3.41.180 Username: administrator Password: ************ OK Cancel

1. Provide a valid Username and Password and click OK to continue.

Note: The default Username is administrator and the default Password is password.

After you have successfully logged in, the connection screen reappears:

Winclient File Help Server List: Name IP Status KE6940AIT 10.3.41.182 (fe80::267d:4diff:fe4b::c78) Available Server IP: 10.3.41.182 Port: 9000 Server is ready. Network disconnect. Server is ready. Disconnect Switch to remote view

At this time there are two active buttons and are described in the table below:

Button Action
Disconnect Breaks	the connection to the unit.
Switch to remote view	Opens a window on the user’s desktop containing the remote server’s display that is the same as the one that appears with the browser-based Windows client.

1. Click Switch to remote view to access the video source(s)' display(s).

Refer to The Control Panel on page 327 for information about the remote access interface.

The Control Panel

The control panel is hidden at the upper or lower center of the screen (the default is up). It becomes visible when you move the mouse pointer over it:

No signal. | 1

Note: 1. The above image shows the complete Control Panel. The icons that appear can be customized. See Control Panel Configuration, page 342, for details.

1. To move the Control Panel to a different location, click and drag the Control Panel.

2. The panel is consisted of two rows.

3. The second row shows the video resolution of the remote display, the bus the user is on, and an information button where you can click it for a menu-style version of the control panel toolbar (see below).
4. Right clicking the second row area also brings up the menu-style control panel. This menu allows you to select options for the Screen Mode, Zoom, Mouse Pointer type, and Mouse Sync Mode. These functions are discussed in the sections that follow.

Video Settings Screen Mode Snapshot Set To Grayscale Zoom Ctrl+Alt+Del On-screen Keyboard Mouse Pointer Mouse Sync Mode Hotkeys Virtual Media Customize Control Panel About Exit

Control Panel Functions

The Control Panel functions are described in the table below.

Icon Function
	This is a toggle. Click to ping the Control Panel to the window where it is always displayed on top of other screen elements. Click again to have it display normally.
	Click to bring up the Video Options dialog box. (See Video Settings, page 332, for details).
	Toggles the display between Full Screen Mode and Windowed Mode.
	Click to take a snapshot (screen capture) of the remote display. To configure the Snapshot parameters, refer to Snapshot on page 343.
	Click to toggle the remote display between color and grayscale.
	Click to zoom the remote display window.Note: This feature is only available in windowed mode (Full Screen Mode is off). See Zoom, page 338 for details.
	Click to send a Ctrl+Alt+Del signal to the remote system.
	Click to bring up the on-screen keyboard (see The On-Screen Keyboard, page 339).
	Click to select the mouse pointer type.Note: This icon changes depending on which mouse pointer type is selected (see Mouse Pointer Type, page 340).
	Click to toggle Automatic or Manual mouse sync.◆ When the selection is Automatic, a green mark appears on the icon.◆ When the selection is Manual, a red mark appears on the icon.See Mouse DynaSync Mode, page 340 for a complete explanation of this feature.

Icon Function
[ABAC]
		These icons show the Num ●ock, Caps ●ock, and Scroll ●ock status of the remote computer.◆ When the lock state is On, the ●ED is bright orange.◆ When the lock state is Off, the ●ED is dull blue.Click on the icon to toggle the status.Note: These icons and your local keyboard icons are in sync. Clicking an icon causes the corresponding ●ED on your keyboard to change accordingly. ●ikewise, pressing a ●ock key on your keyboard causes the icon's color to change accordingly.

Macros

The Macros icon provides access to three functions found in the Macros dialog box: Hotkeys, User Macros, and System Macros. Each of these functions is described in the following sections.

Hotkeys

Various actions, corresponding to clicking the Control Panel icons, can be accomplished directly from the keyboard with hotkeys. Selecting the Hotkeys radio button lets you configure which hotkeys perform the actions. The actions are listed to the left; their hotkeys are shown to the right. Use the checkbox to the left of an action's name to enable or disable its hotkey.

Hotkeys ● Hotkeys Enable Actions Hotkeys ✓ Exit Remote Location F2,F3,F4. □ Adjust Video F5,F6,F7. □ Toggle Control Panel F3,F4,F5. □ Toggle Mouse Display F7,F8,F9. □ Adjust Mouse F8,F7,F6. □ Video AutoSync F6,F7,F8. □ Show/Hide Local Cursor F4,F5. □ Substitute Ctrl Key F11. ✓ Substitute Alt Key F12. Search ○ By Name ○ By Key Search Exit

If you find the default Hotkey combinations inconvenient, you can reconfigure them as follows:

1. Highlight an Action, then click Set Hotkey.

2. Press your selected Function keys (one at a time). The key names appear in the Hotkeys field as you press them.

3. You can use the same function keys for more than one action, as long as the key sequence is not the same.

4. To cancel setting a hotkey value, click Cancel; to clear an action's Hotkeys field, click Clear.

5. When you have finished keying in your sequence, click Save.

To reset all the hotkeys to their default values, click Reset.

An explanation of the Hotkey actions is given in the table below:

Action Explanation
Exit remote location	Exits the remote view. This is equivalent to clicking the Exit icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F2, F3, F4.
Adjust Video Brings up	the Video Settings dialog box. This is equivalent to clicking the Video Settings icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F5, F6, F7.
Toggle Control Panel	Toggles the Control Panel Off and On. The default keys are F3, F4, F5.
Toggle Mouse Display	If you find the display of the two mouse pointers (local and remote) to be confusing or annoying, you can use this function to shrink the non-functioning pointer down to a barely noticeable tiny circle, which can be ignored. Since this function is a toggle, use the hotkeys again to bring the mouse display back to its original configuration. This is equivalent to selecting the Dot pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F7, F8, F9.Note: The Java Control Panel does not have this feature.
Adjust mouse This synchronizes the local and remote mouse movements. The default keys are F8, F7, F6.
Video Auto-sync This	combination performs an auto-sync operation. It is equivalent to clicking the Video Autosync icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F6, F7, F8.
Show/Hide ●ocal Cursor	Toggles the display of your local mouse pointer off and on. This is equivalent to selecting the Null pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F4,F5.
Substitute Ctrl key If	your local computer captures Ctrl key combinations, preventing them from being sent to the remote system, you can implement their effects on the remote system by specifying a function key to substitute for the Ctrl key. If you substitute the F11 key, for example, pressing [F11 + 5] would appear to the remote system as [Ctrl + 5]. The default key is F11.
Substitute Alt key Although all other keyboard input is captured and sent to the remote system, [Alt + Tab] and [Ctrl + Alt + Del] work on your local computer. In order to implement their effects on the remote system, another key may be substituted for the Alt key. If you substitute the F12 key, for example, you would use [F12 + Tab] and [Ctrl + F12 + Del]. The default key is F12.

Video Settings

The Video Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the placement and picture quality of the remote screen display on your monitor.

Video Settings Preset Custom Fair < Video Quality > Excellent Performance: Low 10M Etherent High OK Cancel Advanced>>

The adjustment options are as follows:

Option Usage
	Click this to control the transparency of the Video Settings dialog box.
Performance Select	the type of Internet connection that exists between the●ocal Client computer and the unit. The unit will use that selection to automatically adjust theVideo Qualitysettings to optimize the quality of the video display.Since network conditions vary, if none of the preset choices seem to work well, you can selectCustomizeand use theVideoQualityslider bars to adjust the settings to suit your conditions.
Advanced See page	333 for details.

Gamma Adjustment

For greater control and if it is necessary to correct the gamma level for the remote video display, use the Gamma function of the Advanced Video Settings by clicking the Advanced button.

For gamma level, there are ten preset and four user-defined levels to choose from. Click the drop-down menu and choose the most suitable one.

Video Settings Preset Custom Fair < Video Quality > Excellent Performance: Low 10M Etherent High RGB Red Gain: Green Gain: Blue Gain: Set To Grayscale Reset Min Max Video Quality: Enable Refresh Refresh every 10 seconds Transparency Low High Color depth control Enabled Low High OK Cancel Basic << Gamma Default x:000 y:131 Userdel 1 Save As Reset

The additional options in the Advanced screen are as follows:

Option Usage
RGB Drag the slider	bars to adjust the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values. When an RGB value is increased, the RGB component of the image is correspondingly increased.If you enable Set to Grayscale, the remote video display is changed to grayscale.
Gamma This sectionVideo Quality Drag the	allows you to adjust the video display's gamma level.Click and drag the diagonal line at as many points as you wish to achieve the display output you desire.Click Save As to save up to four user-defined configurations derived from this method. Saved configurations can be recalled from the list box at a future time.Click Reset to abandon any changes and return the gamma line to its original diagonal position.the slider bar to adjust the overall video quality. The larger the value, the clearer the picture and the more video data goes through the network. Depending on the network bandwidth, a high value may adversely affect response time.
Enable Refresh The	unit can redraw the screen every 1 to 99 seconds, eliminating unwanted artifacts from the screen. Select Enable Refresh and enter a number from 1 through 99. The unit will redraw the screen at the interval you specify. This feature is disabled by default. Click to put a check mark in the box next to Enable Refresh to enable this feature.Note: 1. The switch starts counting the time interval when mouse movement stops.2. Enabling this feature increases the volume of video data transmitted over the network. The lower the number specified, the more often the video data is transmitted. Setting too low a value may adversely affect overall operating responsiveness.
Transparency Drag the	slider bars to adjust the transparency of the remote display.
Color Depth Control	This setting determines the richness of the video display by adjusting the amount of color information.

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

Click Cancel to abandon your changes and close the dialog box.

Note: For best results, change the gamma while viewing a remote computer.

Virtual Media

The Virtual Media feature allows a drive, folder, image file, or removable disk on a local client computer to appear and act as if it were installed on the remote server.

Virtual Media also supports a smart card reader function that allows a reader plugged into a local client computer to appear as if it were plugged into the remote server.

Virtual Media Icons

The Virtual Media icon on the Control Panel changes to indicate whether the virtual media function is available, or if a virtual media device has already been mounted on the remote server, as shown in the table below:

Icon Function
	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual media function is disabled or not available.
	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual media function is available. Click the icon to bring up the virtual media dialog box.
[YGCS]	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that a virtual media device has been mounted on the remote server. Click the icon to unmount all redirected devices.

Virtual Media Redirection

To implement the virtual media redirection feature, do the following:

1. Click the Virtual Media icon to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box:

Virtual Media Control Write Mode Device Type Device Name/Path Disable High Speed USB Operation Mode Add Remove Mount Exit

1. Click Add and select the media source.

Drive ISO File Folder Disable High Add Remove Mou

Depending on your selection, additional dialog boxes appear enabling you to select the drive, file, folder, or removable disk you desire. See Virtual Media Support, page 440 for details about mounting these media types.

1. To add additional media sources, click Add, and select the source.

Up to three virtual media choices can be added. To rearrange the selection order, highlight the device you want to move, then click the Up or Down Arrow button to promote or demote it in the list.

1. Read refers to the redirected device being able to send data to the remote server. Write refers to the redirected device being able to have data from the remote server written to it. The default is Read. If you want the redirected device to be writable, check the Enable Write checkbox:

Virtual Media Control Write Mode Device Type Device Name/Path Enable Write Folder C:\Users\Documents\ Enable Write Drive D:\ Disable High Speed USB Operation Mode Add Remove Mount Exit

Note: 1. If a redirected device cannot be written to, or if a user does not have write permissions, it appears in gray and cannot be selected.

1. See Virtual Media Support, page 440, for a list of supported virtual media types.

2. To remove an entry from the list, highlight it and click Remove.

3. After you have made your media source selections, click Mount. The dialog box closes. The virtual media devices that you have selected are redirected to the remote system, where they show up as drives, files and folders on the remote system's file system.

My Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Folders Address My Computer My Computer 3V6 Happy (A:) eSystemME (C:) eSystem2KAS (D:) STORAGE (E:) Compact Disc (F:) Removable Disk (G:) Control Panel Select an item to view its description Displays the files and folders on your computer See also: My Documents My Network Places Network and Dial-up Connections 7 object(s) My Computer

Once mounted, you can treat the virtual media as if they were really on the remote server – drag and drop files to/from them; open files on the remote system for editing and save them to the redirected media, etc.

Files that you save to the redirected media will actually be saved on your local system. Files that you drag from the redirected media will actually come from your local system.

1. To end the redirection, bring up the Control Panel and click on the Virtual Media icon. All mounted devices are automatically unmounted.

Smart Card Reader

Note: This feature is only available when using the WinClient Viewer or the Windows Client AP.

The smart card reader function allows a reader plugged into a local client computer's USB port to be redirected, and appear as if it were plugged into the remote server. One purpose of smart cards (Common Access Cards, for example), is to allow authentication to the remote server from the local client.

When a smart card reader is connected to the local client computer, an entry for it appears when you bring up the Virtual Media dialog box and click Add:

Drive ISO File Folder SmartCard Reader CardMan 6121 Static Driver CardMan 6121

Make your selection and click Mount to complete the redirection.

Zoom

The Zoom icon controls the zoom factor for the remote view window. Settings are as follows:

Setting Description
100% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 100%.
75% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 75%.
50% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 50%.
25% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 25%.
1:1 Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 100%. The difference between this setting and the 100% setting is that when the remote view window is resized its contents don’t resize – they remain at the size they were. To see any objects that are outside of the viewing area move the mouse to the window edge, to have the screen scroll.

The On-Screen Keyboard

The unit supports an on-screen keyboard, available in multiple

languages, with all the standard keys for each supported language.

Click this icon to pop up the on-screen keyboard:

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Ctrl+Esc Alt +Tab PC English US Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 ~ ! 1 @ 2 # 3 $4 % 5 ^6 & 7 * 8 (9) 0 - + = ← Backspace Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { [ ] } Enter Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L : " | Shift Z X C V B N M < , > ? / Shift Ctrl Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl

One of the major advantages of the on-screen keyboard is that if the keyboard languages of the remote and local systems are not the same, you do not have to change the configuration settings for either system. The user just has to bring up the on-screen keyboard; select the language used by the computer on the port he is accessing; and use the on-screen keyboard to communicate with it.

Note: You must use your mouse to click on the keys. You cannot use your actual keyboard.

To change languages, do the following:

1. Click the down arrow next to the currently selected language to drop down the language list.

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Ctrl+Esc Alt +Tab English US Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F ~ 1 @ 2 # 3 $ 4 % 5 6 & 7 * 8 ( ) 9 0 Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L Shift Z X C V B N M < > Ctrl Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl

1. Select the new language from the list.

To display/hide the expanded keyboard keys, click the arrow to the right of the language list arrow.

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Esc | F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - + ← 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Backspace Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { } Enter Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L : " | Shift ↑ Shift ↑ Shift ↑ Shift ↑ Cbl Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl P:Sc ScLK Brk Ins Home PgUp Num / * - 7 Home 8 9 PgUp + 4 5 6 → 1 2 3 Enter End ↓ PgDn 0 Insert . Del

Mouse Pointer Type

The CN9600 offers a number of mouse pointer options when working in the remote display. Click this icon to select the type that you would like to work with:

Dual Crosshairs Dot Single

Note: 1. The Dot pointer is not available with the Java Client Viewer or the Java Client AP.

1. Selecting the Single pointer has the same effect as the Toggle mouse display hotkey function (see Toggle Mouse Display, page 331 for details).

2. The icon on the Control Panel changes to match your choice.

Mouse DynaSync Mode

Clicking this icon selects whether synchronization of the local and remote mouse pointers is accomplished either automatically or manually.

The icon on the toolbar indicates the synchronization mode status as follows:

Icon Function
	The green mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is available and is enabled. This is the default setting when Mouse DynaSync is available.
Icon Function
	The red mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is available but is not enabled.

When Mouse DynaSync is available, clicking the icon toggles between enabled and disabled. If you choose to disable Mouse DynaSync mode, you must use the manual syncing procedures described in the next section.

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync)

Mouse DynaSync provides automatic locked-in syncing of the remote and local mouse pointers – eliminating the need to constantly re-sync the two movements.

Manual Mouse Synchronization

If you are using Manual mouse synchronization instead of automatic DynaSync and the local mouse pointer goes out of sync with the remote system's mouse pointer, there are a number of methods to bring them back into sync:

1. Invoke the Adjust Mouse function with the Adjust Mouse hotkeys (see Adjust mouse, page 331, for details).
2. Move the pointer into all 4 corners of the screen (in any order).
3. Drag the Control Panel to a different position on the screen.
4. Set the mouse speed and acceleration for each problematic computer attached to the switch. See Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures, page 438, for instructions.

Control Panel Configuration

Clicking the Customize Control Panel icon brings up a dialog box that allows you to configure the items that appear on the Control Panel, as well as its graphical settings:

Customize Control Panel Customize Control Panel Auto Hide Video Settings Screen Mode Snapshot Set To Grayscale Zoom Ctrl+Alt+Del On-screen Keyboard Mouse Pointer Mouse Sync Mode NumLock CapsLock ScrLock Hotkeys Virtual Media Customize Control Panel Control Panel Style Transparent Icon Screen Options Full Screen Mode Keep Screen Size Scrolling Method Mouse Movement Scroll Bar User Info User Numbers Snapshot Path: C:\Users\terrynieh\Documents\To Me Browse Format JPEG Quality Lowest 100 Highest JPEG Keyboard Pass Through Enable Window Title Device Name(IP)/Resolution/Frame Rate/Bandwidth OK Cancel

The dialog box is organized into five main sections as described in the table below:

Item Description
Customize Control Panel	Allows you to select which icons are displayed in the Control Panel.
Control Panel Style	♦ Enabling Transparent makes the Control Panel semi-transparent, so that you can see through it to the display underneath.♦ Enabling Icon causes the Control Panel to display as an icon until you mouse over it. When you mouse over the icon, the full panel comes up.
Screen Options	◆ If Full Screen Mode is enabled, the remote display fills the entire screen.◆ If Full Screen Mode is not enabled, the remote display appears as a window on the client desktop. If the remote screen is larger than what is able to fit in the window, scroll bars will appear.◆ If Keep Screen Size is enabled, the remote screen is not resized.◆ If the remote resolution is smaller than that of the client monitor, its display appears like a window centered on the screen.◆ If the remote resolution is larger than that of the client monitor, its display is scaled to the client monitor size.◆ If Keep Screen Size is not enabled, the remote screen is resized to fit the client monitor's resolution.
Scrolling Method	In cases where the remote screen display is larger than your monitor, you can choose how to scroll to the areas that are off-screen.◆ If you select Mouse Movement, the screen will scroll when you move the mouse pointer to your screen border.◆ If you select Scroll Bars, scroll bars appear around the screen borders that you can use to scroll to the off-screen areas.
User Info	If User Numbers is enabled, the total number of users logged into the unit displays beside the resolution on the second row of the Control Panel (See the Control Panel diagram on page 327 for an example.)
Snapshot These	settings let the user configure the unit's screen capture parameters (see the Snapshot description under The Control Panel, page 327):◆ Path lets you select a directory that the captured screens automatically get saved to. Click Browse; navigate to the directory of your choice; then click OK. If you don't specify a directory here, the snapshot is saved to your desktop.◆ Click a radio button to choose whether you want the captured screen to be saved as a BMP or a JPEG (JPG) file.◆ If you choose JPEG, you can select the quality of the captured file with the slider bar. The higher the quality, the better looking the image, but the larger the file size.
Keyboard Pass Through	When this is enabled, the Alt-Tab key press is passed to the remote server and affects that server. If it is not enabled, Alt-Tab acts on your local client computer.
Window Title Use	the drop-down menu to select which remote server information is displayed on the window title.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Chapter 13

Firmware Upgrade Utility

The Windows-based Firmware Upgrade Utility (FWUpgrade.exe) provides a smooth, automated process for upgrading the firmware. The Utility comes as part of a Firmware Upgrade Package that is specific for each device. New firmware upgrade packages are posted on our web site as new firmware revisions become available. Check the web site regularly to find the latest packages and information relating to them:

http://www.aten.com

For browser based firmware upgrade, please refer to FW Upgrade on page 296.

Preparation

1. From a computer that is not part of your installation go to our Internet support site and choose the model name that relates to your KE device to get a list of available Firmware Upgrade Packages.
2. Choose the Firmware Upgrade Package you want to install (usually the most recent), and download it to your computer.
3. Be sure that the computer is connected to the same LAN segment as the KE devices.

Starting the Upgrade

To upgrade your firmware:

1. Run the downloaded Firmware Upgrade Package file - either by double clicking the file icon, or by opening a command line and entering the full path to it. The Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome screen appears:

Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome to the Firmware Upgrade Utility. Put your device into Firmware Upgrade Mode. Use the Firmware Upgrade Cable to connect its Firmware Upgrade Port in your computer (or connect via Ethernet). Agree to the License Agreement; Then Click Next. LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT A IEN International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") wants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use FIRMWARE UPGRADE UTILITY (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device; install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purpose of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the Product over such network; and make backup copies of the Product. RESTRICTIONS You agree not to modify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, recompile, discremble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Product, or create derivative works based on the Product, or remove any proprietary notices or labels on the Product, including copyright, trademark or patent pending notices. You may not sublicense the Product or otherwise allow others to use the Product licensed to you. ● I Agree ○ [Don't Agree] Help About < Back Next > Cancel

Note: The screens shown in this section are for reference only.

1. Read the License Agreement (enable the I Agree radio button).
2. Click Next. The Firmware Upgrade Utility main screen appears:

Firmware Upgrade Utility If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade files. If the device's version is never, the utility let you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin. Device List Status Messages > Loading & testing files ... > Loading & testing files: OK > searching for devices ... Device Description Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log < Back Next > Cancel

1. The Utility inspects your installation. All the devices capable of being upgraded by the package are listed in the Select Master Device list.

If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade file. If the device's version is never, the utility let you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin Device List Select Master Device Master device list: KB690040R-s80135 KB690040R-s80112 KB690040T-s80135 KB690040T-s80110 More than one Master device has been found. Only one Master/Slave device can be upgraded at a time. Please select one of the Master devices from the list OK Cancel Device Descriptio Check Firmware Version Program... Help View Log < Back If East Cancel

1. After you have made your device selection, Click OK and then Next to begin the upgrade.

If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade files. If the device's version is never, the utility lets you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin. Device List KB5900/40R : 000 Device Description CPU : AM3352 Device F/W: Var 1.2.114 Upgrade F/W: Var 1.0.071 MID: 000 Status Messages: > Loading & testing files ... > Loading & testing files: OK > Searching for devices ... > Preparing firmware upgrade ... > Preparing firmware upgrade: OK > Upgrading device KB5900/40R : 000 ... Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log Back Next Cancel

If you enabled Check Firmware Version, the Utility compares the device's firmware level with that of the upgrade files. If it finds that the device's version is higher than the upgrade version, it brings up a dialog box informing you of the situation and gives you the option to Continue or Cancel.

If you didn't enable Check Firmware Version, the Utility installs the upgrade files without checking whether they are a higher level, or not.

As the Upgrade proceeds status messages appear in the Status Messages panel, and the progress toward completion is shown on the Progress bar.

Upgrade Succeeded

After the upgrade has completed, a screen appears to inform you that the procedure was successful:

Firmware Upgrade Utility The Firmware upgrade was successful. Click Finish to close the utility. Device List LE690040R : 000 Status Messages • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device is viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • The device si viting flash now, please wait ... • Upgrading device XB690D40R : 000. CK ■ Firmware Upgrade: OK Device Description CPU : AM3352 Device FWV: Ver 1.2.114 Upgrade FWV: Ver 1.0071 MID: 000 Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log Back Finish Cancel

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed or interrupted upgrade, do the following

1. Power off the KE device.
2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.
3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.
4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the failure.
5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.

This Page Intentionally ●eft Blank

Serial Control Protocol Commands

The KE Series's built-in bi-directional RS-232 serial interface and LAN port connection allows system control via Receivers through a high-end controller or PC. This control feature can also be accessed via TCP/IP through a computer running Telnet. The port for Telnet commands should be set to 9130.

Configuring the Serial Port

The controller's serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver's default configuration, as shown below:

Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

The Receiver's Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 13). Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.

On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session. Please press "Enter" or "T/t" to start "CLI Session" or "Text Menu".

Welcome to ATEN KE8950 User Station Copyright(c) 2009-2013 ATEN International Co., Ltd. --Press ENTER to start CLI session --Press T/t to start TextMenu: Welcome to CLI mode USER NAME:administrator PASSWORD: #>

Device/Profile Commands

When typing a device or profile into a command string, you can enter the name by: IP address (device only), ID or @ with the List number for the device/profile in the command line interface.

Note: To find out about the List number for a device/profile, execute a List command (page 368).

Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first setup and connected to the network.

To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the following:

1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.
2. At the prompt, key in the KE device's IP address with port 9130 in the following way:
   telnet [IP address] [port]
3. Press Enter. The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password.

Welcome to CLI mode USER NAME:administrator PASSWORD:password #>

Verification

After sending a command, a verification message appears at the end of the command line. Use the echo command to identify a command by number:

• Command OK - the command is correct and performed successfully
• Command incorrect - the command has the wrong format and/or values.
• Echo Command - at the end of a command string, type: e1234 – where 1234 can be any number. The verification message returns with the echo number.

Switch Port Command

The formula for Switch Port commands is as follows:

$$ \begin{array}{l} \text {Command + Output + Num1 + Input + Num2 + Mode + Stream +} \ \text {Connect + [Enter]} \end{array} $$

1. For example, if you want to switch the Receiver's connection to Transmitter (192.168.0.20), type the following:

$$ \text { sw i192.168.0.20 [Enter] } $$

1. For example, if you want to disconnect the Receiver from its Transmitter connections, type the following:

$$ \text { sw off } [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, if you want to connect Receiver (192.168.0.99) to Transmitter (192.168.0.79) with exclusive access to stream video and audio, type the following:

$$ \text { sw o192.168.0.99 i192.168.0.79 exclusive video audio on [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.11) from the video stream and return it to the OSD menu, type the following:

$$ \text { sw o192.168.0.11 off [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.09) from the video stream and logout the OSD, type the following:

$$ \text { sw o192.168.0.09 logout [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to disconnect the Receiver's USB stream, type the following:

$$ \text { sw usb off } [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 5th Transmitter listed in the command line interface, type the following:

$$ \text { sw i@5 exclusive all on [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 7th Transmitter listed in the command line interface with echo command 4312, type the following:

$$ \text { sw i@7 exclusive all on e4312 } $$

1. For example, to switch Receiver (192.168.0.12) to the 14th Transmitter listed in the command line interface with occupy access to stream video audio and USB, type the following:

$$ \text { sw o192.168.0.12 i@14 occupy video audio usb on [Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the Switch Port commands:

Command Description
sw Switch port command
Output Description
o Output port command (RX)
Num1 Description
xx Output port
@zz •ist #	xx: Receiver ID or IP address
	zz: 1~99To use the 4th Receiver listed in the command line interface,type: o@4
Input Description
i Input command (TX)
Num2 Description
yy Input port
@zz •ist #	yy: Transmitter ID or IP address
	zz: 1~99To use the 8th Transmitter listed in the command line interface,type: i@8
Mode Description
exclusive Sets	the Access Mode to exclusive.
share Sets	the Access Mode to share.
occupy Sets	the Access Mode to occupy.
viewonly	Sets the Access Mode to view only. If the mode is omitted, view only is used by default.
Stream Description
video	Sets the video source stream
audio	Sets the audio source stream
serial	Sets the serial source stream
Stream	Description
usb Sets the USB source stream
all Sets all source streams
Connect Description
on Connect
off Disconnect
logout •ogout	OSD

The following table lists the available Switch Port commands:

Command	Output Num1	Input Num2	Mode	Stream		Connect	Description
sw o xx	i yy exclusive		video		audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with exclusive access to source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy share		video		audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with share access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy	occupy	video		audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with occupy access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy	viewonly	video		audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with viewonly access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx					off Switch output xx, disconnect streams, return to OSD menu.xx: Receiver ID
sw o xx					logout Switch output xx, disconnect streams and logout from OSD menu.xx: Receiver ID
sw					video audio serial usb all	off	Switch Receiver stream(s) to disconnect.

Command	Output Num1	Input Num2	Mode Stream		Connect	Description
sw off Switch Receiver						disconnect streams, return to OSD menu.
sw i @zz exclusive				share occupy viewonly	video audio serial usb all	on Switch Receiver to input @zz with [mode] access to stream source(s).zz: Transmitter # by order listed in the command line interface.
sw o xx i @zz exclusive		video			audio serial usb all	on Switch output xx to input @zz with [mode] access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDzz: Transmitter # by order listed in command line interface.

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. The Mode command string can be skipped and view only will be used by default.

2. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local Receiver.

Mute Command

The Mute command allows you to enable or disable the audio.

The formula for the Mute command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Num1 } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to turn mute off (audio on) for the Receiver, type the following:

$$ \mathrm{muteoff[Enter]} $$

1. For example, to turn mute on for Receiver (192.168.0.11), type the following:

$$ \text { mute o192.168.0.11 on [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to turn mute off for Receiver (192.168.0.18), type the following:

$$ \text { mute o192.168.0.18 off [Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the Mute commands:

Command Description

mute Mute command

Output Description

o Output port command

Num1 Description

xx Output number

Control Description

on Mute on; audio disabled

off Mute off; audio enabled (default)

The following table lists the available Mute commands:

Command Output Num1 Control Description
mute o	xx	on	Turn mute on for output xxxx: Receiver ID
mute	o	xx	off	Turn mute off for output xxxx: Receiver ID
mute on Turn mute on for Receiver
mute off Turn mute off for Receiver

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. The Control command string can be skipped and off will be used by default.

2. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local Receiver.

Profile Command

The Profile command allows you to connect profiles and video walls.

The formula for Profile commands is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Profile } + \text { Num1 } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to connect profile 8 and lock the OSD menu, type the following:

$$ \text { profile f8 } [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to connect profile 4 with access to the OSD menu, type the following:

$$ \text { profile f4 release [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to disconnect profile 12 and return to the Receiver to the OSD menu, type the following:

$$ \text { profile f12 back [Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the Profile commands:

Command Description

profile Profile command

Profile Description

f Profile ID

Num1 Description

xx Profile or Video Wall ID

Control Description

lock Connect profile, lock access to OSD menu (default)

release Connect profile, allow access to OSD menu

back Disconnect profile, return Receiver to OSD menu

The following table lists the available Profile commands:

Command Profile Num1 Control Description
profile f xx lock Connect profile xx, lock				OSD accessxx:1~99
profile f xx release Connect profile xx, allow				OSD accessxx:1~99
profile f xx back Disconnect profile xx				and return Receiver to OSD menuxx: 1~99

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. The Control command string can be skipped and lock will be used by default.

2. For functional lock and release commands, make sure the Lock OSD when connecting option is checked during Create Profile. Refer to Lock OSD, page 271 for more information.

EDID Command

Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a data that contains a display's basic information and is used to communicate with the video source. The EDID commands allow you to change the EDID setting of a Transmitter. For more information on configuring EDID settings, see Properties, page 174.

The formula for the EDID command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Address } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, if you want to configure device (192.168.0.3) to use the remix EDID mode, type the following:

edid a192.168.0.3 remix [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the EDID commands:

Command Description
edid EDID command
Address Description
a Address command
Number Description
xx Address	numberxx: Receiver ID or IP address
Control Description
auto Checks	the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.
remix Manually	checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (see EDID Mode, page 186).
default Implements	ATEN's default EDID.(default)
manual Manually	set the EDID configuration from the Receiver's OSD (see EDID Mode, page 186).

The following table lists the available EDID commands:

Command	Address	Number	Control	Enter	Description
edid a xx	auto [Enter]	Set EDID	of address		xx to auto.xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	remix [Enter]	Set EDID	of address		xx to remix.xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	default [Enter]	Set EDID	ID of address		xx to default.xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	manual	[Enter] Set	EDID of address		xx to manual.xx: Device ID or IP Address

Reset Command

The Reset command allows you to reset a device back to the default factory settings. Reset includes resetting the devices IP address.

Note: The Reset command resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 423.

The formula for the Reset command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Address } + \text { Number } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to reset device (192.168.0.95), type the following: reset a192.168.0.95 [Enter]

2. For example, to reset the Receiver, type the following: reset [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the Reset command:

Command Description

reset Reset command

Address Description

a Address command

Number Description

xx Address number

The following table lists the available Reset commands:

Command Address Num		Enter	Description
reset	a	xx	[Enter]	Reset address xx back to the factory default settingsxx: Device ID or IP Address
reset			[Enter]	Resets the Receiver settings

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. Skip the Address and Number command strings to reset the local Receiver.

RS-232 Command

The RS-232 command allows you to set the RS-232 settings for a device.

The formula for the RS-232 command is as follows:

$$ \begin{array}{l} \text {Command + Address + Number + Baud Rate + Parity + Data Bit +} \ \text {Stop Bit + Flow Control [ Enter]} \end{array} $$

1. For example, to set device (192.168.0.33) with a baud rate of 38400, parity of none, data bit of 8, and stop bit of 1, type the following:

$$ \text { baud a192.168.0.33 38400 none 8 1 [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to set the local device with a baud rate of 19200, type the following:

$$ \text { baud 19200[Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the RS-232 command:

Command Description
baud RS-232 command
Address Description
a Address command
Num1 Description
xx Address number	xx: Device ID or IP address
Baud Rate Description
9600 Use 9600 baud rate
19200 Use 19200 baud rate
38400 Use 38400 baud rate
115200 Use 115200 baud rate
Parity Description
None Sets the parity to none
Even Sets the parity to even
Odd Sets the parity to odd
Data Bit Description
5 Sets the data bit to 5
6 Sets the data bit to 6
Data Bit Description
7 Sets the data bit to 7
8 Sets the data bit to 8
Stop Bit Description
1 Sets the stop bit to 1
2 Sets the stop bit to 2
Flow Control Description
None Sets flow control to none
Hardware Sets flow control to hardware
Xon Sets flow control to Xon
Xoff Sets flow control to Xoff

The following table lists the available Baud Rate commands:

Command	Address	Num 1	Baud Rate	Parity	Data Bit	Stop Bit	Flow Control	Description
baud a	xx 9600 None			Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 9600, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 19200 None			Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 19200, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 38400 None			Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 38400, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 115200 None			Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 115200, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud 9	600 Set local device							baud rate to 9600
baud 1	9200 Set local device							baud rate to 19200
baud 3	8400 Set local device							baud rate to 38400
baud 1	15200 Set local device							baud rate to 115200

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. The Baud Rate value is required but Parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit can be skipped and their setting will not change.

2. Skip the Address and Number command strings to configure the local device settings.

OSD Command

To enable or disable the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu for a Receiver, use the following command:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to enable the OSD for Receiver 192.168.0.51, type: osd o192.168.0.51 on [Enter]

2. For example, to disable the OSD for the local Receiver, type: osd off [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the OSD command:

Command Description
osd OSD command
Output Description
o Output command
Number Description
xx Output number	xx: Receiver ID or IP address
Control Description
on Enable OSD functions
off Disable OSD functions (default)

The following table lists the available OSD commands:

Command	Output Number Control		Enter	Description
osd	o	xx	on	[Enter] Enable OSD functions for output xxxx: Receiver ID or IP address
osd	o	xx	off	[Enter] Disable OSD functions for output xx off (default)xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. Skip the Output and Number command strings to configure the local Receiver.

List Command

The List command allows you to retrieve information about users, settings and connections.

The formula for the List command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control [Enter] } $$

1. For example, for a complete list of available channels, type the following: list channel [Enter]
2. For example, for a complete list of available profiles, type the following: list profile [Enter]
3. For example, to list all users logged into all OSD menus, type the following:
4. list login [Enter]
5. For example, to list the user logged into the OSD on Receiver (192.168.0.44), type the following:

list o192.168.0.44 login [Enter]

1. For example, for a complete list of available connections, type the following:

list connection [Enter]

1. For example, to list the current connections on Transmitter (192.168.0.88), type the following:

list i192.168.0.88 connection [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the List command:

Command Description

list ●ist command

Output Description

o Output command

Input Description

i Input command

Number Description

xx Output or Input number

Control Description

channel ●ists information about the available channel(s)

profile ●ists information about the available profile and TV wall connections

rx ●ists information about the Receiver

login ●ists information about users logged into to the OSD menu

connection ●ists information about a Transmitters current connections

The following table lists the available List commands:

Command	Output	Input Number	Control Description
list o		xx	login	●ist output xx user logged into OSD.
list o		xx	rx	●ist output xx Receiver information
list		i	xx	connection ●ist input xx Transmitter information
list				channel ●ist all available channel information
list				profile ●ist all available profile information
list				rx ●ist information about all Receivers
list				login ●ist information about all OSD logins
list				connection ●ist information about all connections

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

1. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to view the local Receiver.

Read Command

The Read command allows you to retrieve the properties of a device.

The formula for the Read command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to read all of the local Receiver's properties, type the following:

$$ \text { read all } [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to read all of Receiver (192.168.0.19) device properties, type the following:

$$ \text { read o192.168.0.19 all [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to read all of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) device properties, type the following:

$$ \text { read i192.168.0.28 all [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to read the basic properties of Receiver (192.168.0.61), type the following:

$$ \text { read o192.168.0.61 basic [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to read the network properties of Transmitter (192.168.0.71), type the following:

$$ \text { read i192.168.0.71 network [Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the Read command:

Command Description
read Read command
Output Description
o Output command
Input Description
i Input command
Number Description
xx Output or	input numberxx: Device ID or IP address
Control Description
all Read all device properties
Control	Description
basic Read basic properties
network Read network properties
ipsettings Read IP settings
rs232 Read RS232 properties
properties Read connection properties
manager Read KVM over IP Matrix Manager properties
streams Read enable media properties
tx Read source stream IP properties (Receiver)
usbmode Read USB mode properties (Receiver)
multicast Read multicast properties (Transmitter)
videoqtyadvanced Read advanced video properties (Transmitter)
ossettings Read OS properties (Transmitter)

The following table lists the available Read commands:

Command	Output	Input Number	Control	Description
read	o	i	xx	all	Read output or input xx all device properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	basic	Read output or input xx basic properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	network	Read output or input xx network properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	ipsettings	Read output or input xx IP address properties xx: Device ID or IP address
Command	Output	Input	Number	Control Description
read o i xx rs232 Read output or input xx				RS-232 propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx properties	Read output	or input xx		connection propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx manager	Read output or input xx			KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP and port propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx streams Read output or input xx				enable media propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o xx tx Read output xx source				stream IP address propertiesxx: Receiver ID or IP address
read o xx usbmode Read output xx USB				mode propertiesxx: Receiver ID or IP address
read	i		xx multicast Read input	put xx multicast propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read	i		xx	videoqtyadvanced	Read input xx advanced video propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read	i		xx ossettings Read input	put xx OS propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read				all	Read all properties of local Receiver

Command	Output Input Number	Control Description
read basic			network ipsettings rs232 properties manager streams tx usbmode	Read [control] properties of local Receiver.

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.
2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to read the local Receiver properties.

Set Command

The Set command allows you to configure the properties of a device. Some settings require that both the device and KVM over IP Matrix Manager are online or the command will fail.

The formula for the Set command is as follows:

$$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + \text { Value } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to set the name of the local Receiver to KE6940TX1, type the following:

$$ \text { set Name } = \text { KE6940TX1 } [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to set the description of Transmitter (192.168.0.33) to KE Room B, type the following:

$$ \text { set o192.168.0.19 Description = KE Room B [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to set the DHCP settings of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) to static, type the following:

$$ \text { set i192.168.0.28 dhcpFlag = STATIC [Enter] } $$

1. For example, to set the IP settings of the local Receiver to 192.168.0.2, type the following:

$$ \text { set ipAddr } = 1 9 2. 1 6 8. 0. 2 [ \text { Enter } ] $$

1. For example, to set the Transmitter Video IP setting to 192.168.0.44 for Receiver (192.168.0.56), type the following:

$$ \text { set o192.168.0.56 TxVideoIP = 192.168.0.44 [Enter] } $$

The following tables show the possible values for the Set command:

Command Description
set Set command
Output Description
o Output command
Input Description
i Input command
Number Description
xx Output or	input numberxx: Device ID or IP address
Control Description
Name Sets the device name
Description Sets the device description
iplnstallerFlag Sets the IP installer option
dhcpFlag Sets the DHCP setting
ipAddr Sets the IP address
netmask Sets the subnet mask
gw Sets the default gateway
modeFlag Sets the device mode
BaudRate Sets the baud rate setting
Parity Sets the parity setting
DataBit Sets the data bit setting
StopBit Sets the stop bit setting
FlowCtrl Sets the flow control setting
TxVideoIP Sets the Transmitter video IP setting
TxAudioIP Sets the Transmitter audio IP setting
TxUSBIP Sets the Transmitter USB IP setting
TxRSIP Sets the Transmitter RS-232 IP setting
VideoEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) video source stream
AudioEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) audio source stream
USBEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) USB source stream
RSEnFlag Sets the (enable media) RS232 source stream
ManagerIP	Sets the KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP
ManagerPort	Sets the KVM over IP Matrix Manager port
Beeper Sets the beeper
RxVM Sets the USB mode setting
USBSecure	Sets the USB encryption
PortOS Sets the port OS setting
OS•anguage	Sets the OS language
videoMCastEn	Sets the enable multicast video setting
Control	Description
audioMCastEn Sets	the enable multicast audio setting
Edid Sets the	EDID mode selection setting
VideoType Sets the	video type setting
ColorDepth Sets the	color depth setting
Bandwidth•imit Sets	the bandwidth limit setting
VideoQty Sets the	video quality setting
BGRefresh Sets the	background refresh setting
Beeper Sets the	beeper setting
OccupyTimeout Sets	the occupy timeout setting
Resolution Sets the	resolution setting
Value Description
=yy Set value	to yyyy: Enter a value that corresponds to the control being used

The following table lists the available Set commands:

Command	Output	Input	Number	Control	Value		Description
Set	o	i	xx	Name		yy	Set output or input xx Name to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Name value
Set	o	i	xx	Description		yy	Set output or input xx Description to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Description value
Set	o	i	xx	iplnstallerFlag		yy	Set output or input xx ipInstallerFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, viewonly, disable
Command	Output	Input	Number	Control		Value	Description
Set o i	xx dhcpFlag yy	Set output or input xx				dhcpFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: dhcp, static
Set o i	xx ipAddr yy	Set output or input xx				ipAddr to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o i	xx netmask yy	Set output or input xx				netmask to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Subnet mask value
Set o i	xx gw yy	Set output or input xx				gw to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Default gateway value
Set o i	xx modeFlag yy	Set output or input xx				modeFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: extender, matrix
Set o i	xx BaudRate yy	Set output or input xx				BaudRate to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200
Set o i	xx Parity yy	Set output or input xx				Parity to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: none, even, odd
Set o i	xx	DataBit	yy Set output or input xx			DataBit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 5, 6, 7, 8
Set o i	xx StopBit yy Set output or input xx					StopBit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1, 1.5, 2
Set o i	xx FlowCtrl yy Set output or input xx					FlowCtrl to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: none, hardware, Xon, Xoff
Set o i	xx TxVideoIP yy Set output xx					TxVideoIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxAudioIP yy Set output xx					TxAudioIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxUSBIP yy Set output xx	TxUSBIP				to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxRSIP yy Set output xx	TxRSIP				to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o i	xx VideoEnFlag yy Set output or input xx					VideoEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx AudioEnFlag yy Set output or input xx					AudioEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable

Command	Output	Input	Number	Control Value	Description
Set o i	xx USBEnFlag yy		Set output or input xx		USBEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx RSEnFlag yy		Set output or input xx		RSEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx ManagerIP yy		Set output or input xx		ManagerIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP address
Set o i	xx ManagerPort yy		Set output or input xx		ManagerPort to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: KVM over IP Matrix Manager port
Set o i	xx Beeper yy Set output or input xx				Beeper to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o xx RxVM yy Set output xx RxVM to					yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: vm, vusb
Set o xx USBSecure yy			Set output xx		USBSecure to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: on, off
Set i xx PortOS yy Set input xx PortOS to					yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: win, mac, sun, other

Command	Output	Input	Number	Control	Value	Description
Set i xx	OS●anguage yy Set input xx					OS●anguage to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: english, japanese, french, german, spanish, korean, chinese(traditional), english(uk), swedish, arabic, belgian, canadian-bilingual, french(canada), czech, danish, finnish, greek, hebrew, hungarian, international(iso), italian, latin american, dutch, norwegian, persian(farsi), polish, portuguese, russian, slovak, french (switzerland), german (switzerland), switzerland, reserved, turkish-q, reserved, serbo-croatian
Set i xx	videoM	CastEn	yy Set input xx			videoMCastEn to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set i xx	audioM	CastEn	yy Set input xx			audioMCastEn to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set i xx	Edid yy	Set input xx Edid to yy				xx: Device ID or IP addressyy: default, auto, manual, remix
Set i xx	VideoType yy Set input xx	VideoType				to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: dvi-d, dvi-a
Set i xx	ColorDepth yy	Set input xx	ColorDepth			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 8, 16, 24,and 36 (only for KE89 Series)
Set i xx	Bandwidth●imit	yy Set input xx				Bandwidth●imit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: unlimited, 100, 200, 500
Set i xx	VideoQty yy	Set input xx	VideoQty			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Set i xx	BGRefresh yy	Set input xx	BGRefresh			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: off, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256
Set i xx	OccupyTimeout	yy Set input xx				OccupyTimeout to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1~240
Command	Output	Input	Number	Control Value	Description
Set i xx	Resolution yy		Set input xx	Resolution		to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1920x1200,1920x1080,1680x1050,1600x1200, 1600x900,1440x900, 1400x1050,1366x768, 1280x1024,1280x960, 1280x720,1152x864, 1024x768,800x600, 720x400,640x480, 2560x1080*,3840x2160*,1920x1440*,2560x1600*,2560x1440*,2048x1536**Only for KE89 Series

Safety Instructions

General

• This product is for indoor use only.
• Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference.
  ◆ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device.
• Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If the device falls, serious damage will result.
  ♦ Do not use the device near water.
• Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers.
• The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered.
• The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be placed in a built-in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided.
• Never spill liquid of any kind on the device.
• Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a fire and destroy equipment.
• Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
• The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company.
• To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are properly grounded.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over.

• Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing rests on any cables.

• Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electrical shock.

• Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

• If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair.

• The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed.
  ♦ Liquid has been spilled into the device.

• The device has been exposed to rain or water.
• The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged.
• The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
• The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.

- Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.

Rack Mount

• Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.
• Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.
• Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from the rack.
• Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
• After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a locking position, and then slide the device into the rack.
• Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating.
• Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and other electrical connectors – is properly grounded.
• Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack.
• Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the equipment by the manufacturer.
• Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a rack.

Technical Support

International

• For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation, and software updates: http://support.aten.com
• For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iv.

North America

Email Support [e-mail]
Online Technical Support	Troubleshooting Documentation Software Updates	http://www.aten-usa.com/support
Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN		ext 49881-949-428-1111

When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand:

◆ Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase.
- Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level, expansion cards, and software.
◆ Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred.
- The sequence of operations that led up to the error.
◆ Any other information you feel may be of help.

Specifications

KE6900T / KE6940T

Function KE6900T KE6940T
Connectors Console Ports		Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports	KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)
			Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
			Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
			Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)	2 x DVI-I Female(White)
			RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
		Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
		●AN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches	Function		1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config, ●ocal)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs ●AN			1 (Green / Orange)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 7.34 W	DC 5 V, 8.91 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.14 kg 1.15 kg
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

KE6900R / KE6940R

Function KE6900R KE6940R
Connectors US	B Virtual Media 2 x USB		Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x	USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x U	SB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x	Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini	Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male		(Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
	●AN 1 x RJ-45 Female		(Black)
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton
	Video 1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs ●AN			1 (Green / Orange)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.9 W	DC 5 V, 9.53 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		1.25 kg	1.25 kg
	Dimensions(● x W x H)		22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

KE6900AT / KE6940AT

Function KE6900AT KE6940AT
Connectors C	console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power		2 x DC Jack (Black)
	●AN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches	Function		1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs	●AN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 7.95 W	DC 5 V, 12.2 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)	1.17 kg (2.58 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6900AR / KE6940AR

Function KE6900AR KE6940AR
Connectors USB	B Virtual Media 2 x USB		Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x	USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DV	I-I Female(White)	2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x US	SB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x	Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini	Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
	●AN 1 x RJ-45 Female		(Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton
	Video		1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs ●AN	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.35 W	DC 5 V, 8.51 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 - 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 - 60 °C
	Humidity		0-95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		1.30 kg (2.86 lb)	1.31 kg (2.89 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)		22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT
Connectors	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
	●AN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)1 x SFP Slot
	Internet Port		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches	Function		1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs	●AN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 12 V: 12 W :60 BTU	DC 12 V : 18.36 W :90 BTU
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.16 kg (2.56 lb)	1.18 kg (2.60 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6900ST

Function KE6900ST
Connectors	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse	USB Type B Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-D Male (White)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
	●AN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switch Reset 1	x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs ●AN 1 (Green / Orange)
			Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption 5 V / 7.3 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp. 0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		0.43 kg
	Dimensions(● x W x H)		14.39 x 10.30 x 3.00 cm

KE6910

Function KE6910R		KE6910T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x US		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 9.02 W DC 5 V, 10.02 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.26 kg	1.13 kg
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 21.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

KE6912

Function KE6912R		KE6912T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		USB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)	1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot	1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 48 V /		11.27 W (PoE) DC 48 V / 12.53 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.28 kg	1.17 kg
	Dimensions (● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 2	1.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

KE6920

Function KE6920R		KE6920T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x US		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)2 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 8.86 W DC 5 V, 10.87 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.27 kg	(2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6922

Function KE6922R		KE6922T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		USB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)	2 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)2 x SFP Slot	1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)2 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 48 V /		11.54 W DC 48 V / 13.59 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x		2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.30 kg	(2.86 lb) 1.18 kg (2.6 lb)
	Dimensions (● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE8900S

Function KE8900SR KE8900ST
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (Black)			N/A
Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (Black)			N/A
KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female			(White)
			1 x HDMI Female (Black)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC Jack (Black) 1 x DC Jack (Black)
			1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)
●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
Switches Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs 10/100/1000 Mbps		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 5V, 4.35 W	DC 5V, 3.8 WDC 48V, 5.53 W
Video Resolution		Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.	0–50°C
	Storage Temp.	-20–60°C
	Humidity	0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing	Metal
	Weight	0.64 kg	0.65 kg
	Dimensions (● x W x H)	18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm

KE8950T / KE8952T

Function KE8950T KE8952T
Connectors O	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	●AN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)	1 x RJ-45 Female (Black; PoE)
	●AN		1 x SFP Module Female (Black)
	Power		1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config, ●ocal)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs	●AN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.56 W	DC 48 V, 9.02 W (PoE)
Video Resolution			Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE8950T KE8952T
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.10 kg (2.42 lb)	1.13 kg (2.49 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

KE8950R / KE8952R

Function KE8950R KE8952R
Connectors US	B Virtual Media 2 x USB		Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x	USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x HD	MI Female (Silver)
		Mouse 1 x US	SB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x	Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini	Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	●AN 1 x RJ-45 Female		(Black)	1 x RJ-45 Female (Black; PoE)
	●AN 1 x SFP Module F eale (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton
	Video		1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black) (Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs	●AN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	●ocal		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 5.65 W	DC 48 V, 7.06 W (PoE)
Video Resolution			Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 - 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 - 60 °C
	Humidity		0-95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE8950R KE8952R
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.23 kg (2.71 lb)	1.26 kg (2.78 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

KE9900ST

Function KE9900ST
Connectors KV	M Ports 1 x USB Type B	Female (White)
		1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)
		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
		1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)
	●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
Switches Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
●EDs 10/100/1000 Mbps 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 4.75 W; DC 48 V, 6.97 W
Video Resolution		Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment	Operating Temp. 0 - 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 - 60 °C
	Humidity	0-95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing	Metal
	Weight	0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm(7.17 x 4.63 x 1.13 in.)

KE9950

Function KE9950R		KE9950T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DisplayPort Female(Black)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 5 V, 8.03 W	DC 5 V, 9.51 W
Video Resolution		Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz
Environment Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
		Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
		Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.24 kg	(2.73 lb) 1.12 kg (2.47 lb)
	Dimensions (● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

KE9952

Function KE9952R		KE9952T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DisplayPort Female(Black)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)	1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
		●AN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot	1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video 1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, ●ocal)
●EDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	●ocal	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 48 V / 10.04 W (PoE)	DC 48 V / 11.88 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz
Environment Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.27 kg	(2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
	Dimensions(● x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

Optional Rack Mount

Optional rack mount kits are available as shown in the following table:

Mount Type Model
Dual Rack Mount Kit* 2X-021G
Single Rack Mount Kit* 2X-031G
Video Extender Rack Mount Kit**(for KE6900ST, KE8900ST, KE8900SR and KE9900ST)	VE-RMK 1U

*Supports KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952.

**Please refer to VE-RMK 1U user manual on how to mount these units.

Dual Rack Mount

The 2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit installs two KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952 units side by side in 1U of server rack space.

Transmitter Dual Rack Mount

KE8950T is the example used here.

1. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.

Link Bracket

1. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.

Remove screws Remove screws

1. Use the screws in step 2 to install the left and right mounting brackets.

Technical line drawing of a computer chassis with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with ventilation grilles and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Receiver Dual Rack Mount

KE8950R is the example used here.

1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the receiver units.

ALTUSON ALTUSON

1. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.

Link Bracket

1. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.

Remove Screws Remove Screws

1. Use the screws in step 3 to install the left and right mounting brackets.

Technical line drawing of a multi-chamber electronic device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with mounting brackets and structural elements (no text or symbols)

Single Rack Mount

The 2X-031G Single Rack Mount kit installs one KE6900/KE6940/KE8950/KE8952 unit within a 1U rack space.

1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the unit (receiver units only).

ALTUSEN ALTUSEN

1. Remove the bottom and side screws from the unit.

Isometric line drawing of a device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Use the screws in step 2 to install the right and left mounting brackets.

Technical line drawing of a device chassis with labeled ports and connectors (no text or symbols present)

1. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack.

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with vertical supports and a central device (no text or symbols)

IP Installer

From a client computer running Windows, an IP address for a transmitter or receiver can be assigned with the IP Installer utility. The utility can be obtained from the Download area of our website or from the product page on the Software & Driver tab. After downloading the utility to your client computer, do the following:

1. Unzip the contents of IPInstaller.zip to a directory on your hard drive.

2. Go to the directory that you unzipped the IPInstaller program to and run IPInstaller.exe. A dialog box similar to the one below appears:

Network Device IP Installer Device list: Device Name Model Name MAC Address IP Address KE6900T KE6900T 00-10-74-s9-01-10 172.17.17.67 KE6940T KE6940T 00-10-74-s9-01-35 172.17.17.61 KE6900R KE6900R 00-10-74-s8-01-12 172.17.17.60 KE6940R KE6940R 00-10-74-s8-01-35 172.17.17.80 SN3101 SN3101 00-10-74-42-00-31 172.17.17.18 Protocol: IPv4 Network adapter: MAC: 00-19-db-ea-8c-d3, IP: 172.17.17.20 IPv4 settings Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) Use the following IP address: IP address: 172 . 17 . 17 . 67 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default gateway: 172 . 17 . 17 . 254 Enumerate Set IP IPv6 address: Subnet prefix length: Default gateway:

1. Select the Transmitter or Receiver in the Device List.

Note: 1. If the list is empty, or your device doesn't appear, click Enumerate to refresh the Device List.

1. If there is more than one device in the list, use the MAC address to pick the one you want. The MAC address is located on the devices bottom panel.

2. Select either Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), or Specify an IP address. If you chose the latter, fill the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields with the information appropriate to your network.

3. Click Set IP.

4. After the IP address shows up in the Device List, click Exit.

Trusted Certificates

Overview

When you try to log in to the device from your browser, a Security Alert message appears to inform you that the device's certificate is not trusted, and asks if you want to proceed.

Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others. However, there is a problem with the site's security certificate. The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust. View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority. The security certificate date is valid. The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed? Yes No View Certificate

The certificate can be trusted, but the alert is triggered because the certificate's name is not found on the Microsoft list of Trusted Authorities. You can ignore the warning and click Yes to go on.

Self-Signed Private Certificates

If you wish to create your own self-signed encryption key and certificate, a free utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web at www.openssl.org. To create your private key and certificate do the following:

1. Go to the directory where you downloaded and extracted openssl.exe to.
2. Run openssl.exe with the following parameters:

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf

Note: 1. The command should be entered all on one line (i.e., do not press [Enter] until all the parameters have been keyed in).

1. If there are spaces in the input, surround the entry in quotes (e.g., "ATEN International").

To avoid having to input information during key generation the following additional parameters can be used:

/C /ST /L /O /OU /CN /emailAddress.

Examples

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj "/C=yourcountry/ST=yourstateorprovince/L=yourlocationor city/O=yourorganization/OU=yourorganizationalunit/CN=yourcommonname/emailAddress=[e-mail]
openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj "/C=CA/ST=BC/L=Richmond/O=ATEN International/OU=ATEN /CN=ATEN/emailAddress=[e-mail] 

Importing the Files

After the openssl.exe program completes, two files – CA.key (the private key) and CA.cer (the self-signed SSL certificate) – are created in the directory that you ran the program from.

Reset All Information

To reset all information (including passwords) to their default settings, follow the steps below:

1. Power off the unit and remove its housing.

2. Use a jumper cap to short the mainboard pins labeled DEFAULT PASSWORD. An example is shown:

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout showing connectors, drive bays, and a circuit board (no text or labels)

1. Power on the unit.

2. After the unit is turned on, power off the unit.

3. Remove the jumper cap from the Reset pins and close the housing.

4. Power on the unit again.

After powering on the unit, you can use the default administrator Username and Password (see Logging In, page 205) to log in.

Default Password Pins

The Default Password pins for different models are shown below.

KE6900ST

Floor plan diagram with room labels and directional arrows, no readable text or symbols

KE6900AR

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE6900AT

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE6900AiT

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6940AR

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6940AT

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE6940AiT

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE6910R / KE6912R

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout showing connectors, drive bays, and socket (no text or labels)

■ KE6910T / KE6912T

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with connectors and components (no text or labels)

■ KE6920R / KE6922R

Top-down schematic of a device layout with labeled components and an arrow pointing to a component (no readable text or symbols)

■ KE6920T / KE6922T

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with connectors and a central circuit board (no text or labels)

KE8900SR

Pure technical diagram of a circuit board layout without any text, numbers, or symbols

KE8900ST

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard showing connector layout and mounting points (no text or labels)

■ KE8950R / KE8952R

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE8950T / KE8952T

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE9900ST

Technical line drawing of a computer motherboard with multiple connectors and a grid-patterned circuit board (no text or symbols)

■ KE9950R / KE9952R

Top-down schematic of an electronic circuit board layout with components and connectors (no text or labels)

■ KE9950T / KE9952T

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with connectors, drive bays, and indicator lights (no text or labels)

RS-232 Pin Assignments

Pin assignments for the Transmitter and Receiver's rear RS-232 port that is used for connecting to a serial terminal are given in the table, below:

Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
2 RXD	Receive Data
3 TXD	Transmit Data
4 DTR	Data Terminal Ready
5 GND	Signal Ground
6 DSR	Data Set Ready
7 RTS	Request to Sent
8 CTS	Clear to Sent
9 N/A None

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port

Pin assignments for the Transmitter's front RS-232 port that is used for connecting to a computer for serial control are given in the table, below:

Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
2 TXD Transmit Data
3 RXD Receive Data
4 DSR Data Set Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DTR Data Terminal Ready
7 CTS Clear to Sent
8 RTS Request to Sent
9 N/A None

Multicast IP Address

Multicasting helps to broadcast audio and video data from a transmitter to multiple Receivers over a network. To setup up Multicasting on a network switch you must know the Audio and Video Multicast IP address which can be found on the KE Transmitter. To determine the default Multicast IP address set by the KE device use the instructions below. The Multicast IP addresses can be set manually using Telnet.

KE Multicast Rule

All Audio and Video Multicast IP addresses use the format: 230.X.Y.Z.

X.Y.Z relates to the Transmitter's IP address and 230 is always the first octet of a Multicast IP address. You use the Transmitter's IP address to find X and then use it to calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address.

Multicast IP Formula

To calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address, use the Transmitter's IP address to determine X and then use the appropriate table below to calculate the Multicast IP address for each data stream (audio/video).

Example:

Transmitter IP Address: 172.16.27.146; (172.X.Y.Z) X = 16

If X is between 0 \~ 127

Transmitter IP X		VideoX + 128	AudioX + 192	MulticastVideo IPAddress	MulticastAudio IPAddress
172.16.27.146(example)	16	6 + 128 =144	16 + 192 =208	230.144.27.146	230.208.27.146
		___+ 128 =	___+ 192 =	230._.._.	230._.._.
		___+ 128 =	___+ 192 =	230._.._.	230._.._.
		___+ 128 =	___+ 192 =	230._.._.	230._.._.

If X is between 128 \~ 192

Transmitter IP	X - 128 = A	Video A + 128	Audio A + 192	Multicast Video IP Address	Multicast Audio IP Address
172.168.27.14 (example)	168 - 128 = 40	40 + 128 = 168	40 + 192 = 232	230.168.27.14	230.232.27.14
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.

If X is 192 or higher

Transmitter IP	X - 192 = A	Video A + 128	Audio A + 192	Multicast Video IP Address	Multicast Audio IP Address
172.200.27.14 (example)	200 - 192 = 8	8 + 128 = 136	8 + 192 = 200	230.136.27.14	230.200.27.14
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._.	230._._._.

Keys to Network Performance

For optimum performance, KE Series devices requires high amounts of data to be transferred across a network; therefore we recommend the following strategies to setup KE Series devices. Using our suggestions will provide better performance and the highest video resolutions possible. Use each of the keys to ensure the best transmission of data and the highest throughput possible.

Build a Network Diagram

To build an effective KE installation, start by mapping out the layout. Create a diagram with the KE devices, computers and routers along with how they will be connected across the network. It also helps to write out how the devices will interact. Use this diagram as the frame work as you decide what devices to purchase and how to build the network effectively for the best data throughput.

Considerations:

- If possible, create a private network for the KE devices

◆ Use the same switch model throughout

◆ Use a flat cascaded layout

♦ Avoid a tree or pyramid structure

♦ Limit cascades to two levels

◆ Install network switches near each other

♦ Minimize the distance of connections

- Install KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) computer and KE devices on the same subnet

◆ Check the 3 Other Factors before installation

Other Factors

■ Choose the Right Cable

Always use Cat 5/6e Ethernet cable or higher installed by a professional between any two devices you are installing. We recommend using ATEN Brand Ethernet cable to ensure the quality. It’s best when installing KE devices to use brand new Ethernet cabling for each part of the installation to ensure the reliability of the data being transmitted. This is a key to getting the best uninterrupted video resolution across the network.

■ Determine the Distance

Distance is an important factor when setting up networks, with a shorter distance and fewer hops through routers, data can be transmitted more efficiently. So whenever possible decrease the distance and direct network traffic effectively between subnets that communicate with each other to increase the data throughput.

■ Ensure the Bandwidth

Ensuring the bandwidth ahead of time will guarantee performance before installing KE devices on a network. This will eliminate the primary cause of problems related to video quality and transmission of data. If the speed is right at all ends of your network, then the only other causes are derived from device failure or limits caused by a router, switch or device setting.

Sample Network Diagram

graph TD
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC1["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T -->|Console port| KE6900T
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1["KE6900R"] -->|Console port| KE6900R1
        KE6900R -->|Console port| KE6900R2["KE6900R"]
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC2["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T2["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T2 -->|Console port| KE6900T2
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1 -->|Console port| KE6900R2
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T2["KE6900T"]
        PC3["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T3["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T3 -->|Console port| KE6900T3
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T3["KE6900T"]
        PC4["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T4["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T4 -->|Console port| KE6900T4
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1 -->|Console port| KE6900R2
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R3["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1 -->|Console port| KE6900R3
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R3["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R2 -->|Console port| KE6900R3
    end
    subgraph_CCKM["CCKM"]
        KCM1["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T2["KE6900T"]
        KCM2["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T3["KE6900T"]
        KCM3["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T4["KE6900T"]
    end

Choose a High Performance Switch

A high performance network switch is the means of a successful KE setup. When choosing a network switch, first select the type:

Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches

You'll need to determine whether you need a layer 2 or a layer 3 switch for your KE network. Layer 3 switches cost more than layer 2 switches because they are more complex and handle more network traffic. The best way to calculate which type of switch you need is to first determine if you will have a dedicated network for the KE devices or if the KE devices will be on a network that shares throughput with other network equipment such as computers, servers and printers. If they share the network with other devices its best to consider a layer 3 switch and use layer 2 switches exclusively for the KE device connections. For larger installations we recommend using Layer 3 switches. The major differences are:

Layer 3 Switch: IP addresses in packets are examined and intelligent forwarding decisions are made. On a larger network broken into subnets across long distances, a layer 3 switch becomes the best choice as they can improve network efficiency and provide better traffic flow. They are better at directing more traffic to different locations on a larger more complex network, and with layer two switches working below them.

Layer 2 Switch: Packets are examined and forwarded using only the MAC address. If you have a small central network, a layer 2 switch should do the job. If the network is exclusive and will only transmit the bandwidth of KE devices, layer 2 switches with the correct settings can get the job done effectively.

Considerations

Number of ports

Choose a switch that has enough ports to match the number of KE devices you will be installing. Switches typically come in 5, 8, 10, 16, 24, 28, 48, and 52-port configurations. If you are installing 13 KE transmitters and 13 KE receivers, you will need to purchase a switch with at least 28 ports.

Stackable verse Standalone

Stackable switches allow you to easily manage and configure ports spanning across multiple switches that the KE devices are connected through. This provides a centralized method to configure and troubleshoot the initial setup of

KE devices on a network which makes fine tuning the bandwidth, data throughput and video quality easier. Stackable switches can be configured to direct the KE transmissions between many units more specifically and effectively. Standalone switches provide the same configuration features as Stackable switches but they must be set individually.

Stackable switches provide an easy way to manage multiple switches, as one unit. For example, instead of configuring, managing, and troubleshooting 6 28-port switches individually, you can manage the six as if they are a single unit using Stackable Switches. The six switches (168 ports) function as a single switch and are managed from one web or GUI interface.

What Stackable Switches Can do:

1. Create a link aggregation group with one port in one unit of the stack and another port of that group in another switch in the stack.
2. Select a port on one switch in the stack and mirror the traffic to a switch port on another unit of the stack; thus copy the configuration to direct traffic more effectively between KE devices.
3. Apply custom ACL security settings to any port on any switch in the stack.
4. Stackable switches can be setup in a ring configuration, so that if a port or cable fails, the stack automatically routes around the failure, at microsecond speeds. Stackable Switches also allow you to add and remove stack “members” which are automatically updated and recognized as such.

Switch Specifications

The following specifications are recommended when choosing a layer 2 or layer 3 switch:

◆ 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (1000Mbps or faster Ethernet ports)
◆ High bandwidth between switches, if possible using Fibre Channel
- Layer 3 switches that efficiently processes IGMP queries
♦ IGMP Snooping v2 or v3
♦ Flow Control Functions
◆ Throughput of: Full Duplex, 1Gbps up- and down- stream speeds per port
◆ Performance of their most onerous tasks (e.g. IGMP snooping) with multiple dedicated processors (ASICS)
- Use the same switch make and model throughout each subnet

- The maximum number of simultaneous ‘snoopable groups’ the switch can handle meets or exceeds the number of KE transmitters that will be used to create Channel groups

Configuring Switches and KE Devices

Configuring the switch correctly will pass data more efficiently, allowing a better stream across the network to each KE device. The following settings will help optimize your network traffic through a switch:

◆ Enable IGMP Snooping on L2 switches
◆ Enable IGMP Querier on the L3 switch
- Enable IGMP Fast-Leave on all switches where KE units are directly connected
- Enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on all switches and enable Portfast exclusively on switch ports that have KE units connected
- Pick an appropriate forwarding mode on all switches. Use Cut-through if available, or Store and Forward (see Recommended Network Switches below)

KE transmitter Settings:

• Adjust the KE transmitter settings one at a time, in small intervals, and view the images as you do, so that you can adjust to the positive or negative results and achieve the best quality and bandwidth possible
• If the quality of color is important, set the Color Depth to 24 bits (KE69, KE89, KE99 Series) and manually adjust other settings until you are satisfied with the visual appearance
• If moving video images are shown frequently, increase the Video Quality setting to the highest level and reduce the Bandwidth Limit and Color Depth setting.
• When images on the screen are more often static, increase the Background Refresh and/or the Video Quality settings
• Check that all KE units have been updated with the latest firmware version

Recommended Network Switches

Please refer to the FAQ link below on how to select network switches and network switch information collected by ATEN Customer Service Division, where the collected information includes customer's feedback from their actual experience in using and installing the product(s).

https://eservice.aten.com/eServiceCx/Common/FAQ/view.do?id=6276

Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures

If the mouse synchronization procedures mentioned in the manual fail to resolve mouse pointer problems for particular computers, try the following:

Windows:

Note: In order for the local and remote mouses to synchronize, you must use the generic mouse driver supplied with the MS operating system. If you have a third party driver installed - such as one supplied by the mouse manufacturer - you must remove it.

1. Windows 2000:

a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel → Mouse → Mouse Properties)
b) Click the Motion tab
c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)
d) Set the mouse acceleration to None

Mouse Properties Buttons Pointers Motion Hardware Speed Adjust how fast your pointer moves Slow Fast Acceleration Adjust how much your pointer accelerates as you move it faster None Low Medium High Snap to default OK Move pointer to the default button in dialog boxes OK Cancel Apply

1. Windows XP / Windows Server 2003 / Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 10:

a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel → Mouse) (For Windows 10, click Start → Devices → Mouse → Additional mouse options)

b) Click the Pointer Options tab
c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)
d) Disable Enhance Pointer Precision

Mouse Properties Buttons Pointers Pointer Options Wheel Hardware Motion Select a pointer speed: Slow Fast Enhance pointer precision Snap To Automatically move pointer to the default button in a dialog box Visibility Display pointer trail Short Long Hide pointer while typing Show location of pointer when I press the CTRL key OK Cancel Apply

3. Windows ME:

Set the mouse speed to the middle position; disable mouse acceleration (click Advanced to get the dialog box for this).

4. Windows NT / Windows 98 / Windows 95:

Set the mouse speed to the slowest position.

Sun / Linux

Open a terminal session and issue the following command:

Sun: xset m 1

Linux: xset m 0

or

xset m 1

(If one does not help, try the other.)

Virtual Media Support

WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP

♦ IDE CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only
♦ IDE Hard Drives – Read Only
- USB CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only
- USB Hard Drives – Read/Write*
- USB Flash Drives – Read/Write*
♦ USB Floppy Drives – Read/Write

* These drives can be mounted either as Drives or Removable Disks (see Virtual Media, page 335). Mounting them as removable disks allow booting the remote server if the disk contains a bootable OS. In addition, if the disk contains more than one partition, the remote server can access all the partitions.

♦ ISO Files – Read Only
- Folders – Read/Write
Smart Card Readers

Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP

♦ ISO Files – Read Only
◆ Folders – Read/Write

Note: 1. The Java Client supports Virtual Media in the same way as WinClient does – however, the account should have Administrator level privilege.

1. Folder mapping uses a FAT16 file system, so there is a 2G limitation. Virtual Media only supports ISO files less than 4G.

Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows

1. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.
3. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.
4. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.0.2 and 192.168.0.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup.
5. Click OK to change the CCKM server's IP address.

Note: Make sure the CCKM server's IP address is not a duplicate to prevent IP address conflict.

To connect to the CCKM server via web browser, enter the CCKM IP address and port number (default: 8443). For example, if the CCKM IP address is 192.168.0.10, then enter https://192.168.0.10: 8443.

If you have a 2nd NIC, please follow the following steps.

1. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection for the 2nd NIC and select Properties.
3. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.
4. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP of the 2nd subnet for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup.
5. Click OK to change the CCKM server's IP address of the 2nd subnet.

Limited Warranty

ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+ Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the Standard Warranty.

What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days, whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles shall become the property of ATEN.

To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website:

http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/

© Copyright 2022 ATEN® International Co., •td.

Released: 2022-12-21

ATEN and the ATEN logo are registered trademarks of ATEN International Co., ♦td. All rights reserved. All other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners.